YASKAWA E7 U AC drive User Manual
Below you will find brief information for AC drive E7 E7U. This variable torque AC drive is specifically designed for HVAC applications in building automation, including fans, blowers, and pumps. The E7 comes with numerous built-in features such as network communications, H/O/A, PI, parameter storage, and copy functions. The E7 has embedded communications for popular building automation protocols, Johnson Controls Metasys® and Siemens APOGEETM FLN, as well as Modbus®. Built-in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system. It includes feedback display, inverse, square root, and differential control functions, and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Model: E7U Document Number: TM.E7.01
E7 Drive
User Manual
Quick Reference for E7 Parameters
b3-14 b4-01 b4-02 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-06 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04 b2-09 b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-07 b1-08 b1-11 b1-12 b2-01
A2-27
A2-28
A2-29
A2-30
A2-31
A2-32 b1-01
A2-18
A2-19
A2-20
A2-21
A2-22
A2-23
A2-24
A2-25
A2-26
A2-11
A2-12
A2-13
A2-14
A2-15
A2-16
A2-17
A2-03
A2-04
A2-05
A2-06
A2-07
A2-08
A2-09
A2-10
Parameter
Number
A1-00
A1-01
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
A2-01
A2-02
Factory
Setting
0
2
0
0
0
2
5
100
100
0
0
1
0
2
120
2
0.2
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.5
1
1
0
1
0
User
Setting
d3-04 d4-01 d4-02
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06 d1-04 d1-17 d2-01 d2-02 d2-03 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
C6-01
C6-02
C6-03
C6-04
C6-05 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03
C1-04
C1-09
C1-11
C2-01
C2-02
C4-01
C4-02 b5-29 b5-30 b8-01 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03 b5-22 b5-23 b5-24 b5-25 b5-26 b5-27 b5-28
Parameter
Number
b5-07 b5-08 b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19 b5-20 b5-21
0
0
0
0
0
6
100
0
1
0
10
240V or 480V
F
60
240V or 480V
60
2 kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
0
0
0
0
30
10
0
0.2
0.2
1
200
1
0
0 kVA Dep.
20
0
30
30
30
0
60
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
Factory
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
User
Setting
L2-04
L2-05
L3-01
L3-02
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
L4-01
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
H5-08
H5-09
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
H4-08
H5-01
H3-03
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H3-13
H4-01
H4-02
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
H2-01
H2-02
H3-02
Parameter
Number
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
E2-01
E2-03
E2-05
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-05
H1-01
User
Setting
n3-01 n3-02 n3-03 n3-04 o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-05 o1-06
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
L8-18
L8-19 n1-01 n1-02
Parameter
Number
L4-02
L4-05
L4-06
L5-01
L5-02
L5-03
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-06
L8-09
L8-10 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-10 o2-12 o2-14 o2-15 o3-01 o1-07 o1-08 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o3-02
T1-02
T1-04 3
1
1
8
0.2
2 kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
Voltage Dep.
1
120
1
1
120
0
0
2
5
1
3
1
3
0
0
0
0
1F
0
8
50
0.3
0
2
100
0
2
2
100
0
14
3
4
6
0
A
100
Factory
Setting
3
18
1.5
10.8
0
0
0 kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
1
0
1
0
24
3
0
1
0
5
150
1
40
6
300
45
1
1
20
1
1
Factory
Setting
2
1
80
0
0
180
6
15
10
0 kVA Dep.
4 kVA Dep.
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
2
3
1
1
0 kVA Dep.
1
0 kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
User
Setting
Warnings and Cautions
This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product, that if not heeded, may result in personal injury, fatality, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions.
WARNING
YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications. The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part’s safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user. YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED.
YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
WARNING
•
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing this Drive. All warnings, cautions, and instructions must be followed. All activity must be performed by qualified personnel. The Drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes.
•
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on.
•
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. Status indicator LEDs and Digital Operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below
50 VDC. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
•
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage.
•
The Drive is not suitable for circuits capable of delivering more than the specified RMS symmetrical amperes. Install adequate branch short circuit protection per applicable codes. Refer to the specification. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and/or personal injury.
•
Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive. These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications.
•
To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor, auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit.
•
YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user; doing so will void the warranty. This product must not be modified.
•
Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
•
To meet CE directives, proper line filters and proper installation are required.
Warnings i
WARNING
•
Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed, to describe details. These must be replaced before operation.
•
Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit cards to prevent ESD damage.
•
The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power. Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before energizing the Drive.
•
Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Intended Use
Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
For use in the European Union, the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60201-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
EN 61010, 1997-11Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950:1991 + A1:1992 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1996, modified)
CE certification per EN 50178 can be achieved using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
Other
The E7 Drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240Vac maximum (240V Class) and 480Vac maximum (480V Class).
Warnings ii
Introduction
This Section describes the applicability of the Manual
The E7 Drive is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for 3-Phase AC induction motors. This type of Drive is also known as an
Adjustable Frequency Drive, Variable Frequency Drive, AC Drive, AFD, ASD, VFD, and Inverter. In this manual, the E7
Drive will be referred to as the “Drive”.
The E7 Drive is a variable torque AC drive, designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation, including fans, blowers and pumps. A new benchmark for size, cost, performance, benefits, and quality, the E7 includes numerous built-in features such as network communications, H/O/A, PI, parameter storage and copy functions.
The E7 has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols, Johnson Controls Metasys
®
and
Siemens APOGEE
TM
FLN, as well as Modbus
®
. An optional L
ON
W
ORKS
®
interface card is also available.
The LCD keypad/operator is equipped with Hand/Off/Auto functions, copy feature, 7 language choices, and 5 lines of display with 16 characters per line. User parameter settings can be recovered at any time via “user initialization”. Optional software allows upload/download, as well as graphing and monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management.
Built-in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system. It includes feedback display, inverse, square root and differential control functions, and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.
This manual is applicable to E7 Drives defined by model numbers CIMR-E7U_ _ _ _ . This manual reflects the Software Version 4010.
This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur. The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the
Yaskawa website www.drives.com
. The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made.
Introduction iii
This manual may describe trademarked equipment, which is the property of other companies. These trademarks are the property of the registered owner companies and may include the following:
APOGEE
TM
FLN, trademark of Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Metasys
®
, trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
Modbus
®
, trademark of Schneider Automation, Inc.
L
ON
W
ORKS
®
, trademark of Echelon Corporation
Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product. These documents may be provided with the product or upon request. Contact Yaskawa Electric America, Inc. as required. Documents may include the following:
TM.E7.02.Programming… Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.11.Modbus… Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.20.L
ON
W
ORKS
… Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.21.APOGEE
… Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM. E7.22. Metasys… Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7B.01. Bypass… This manual should be used when the E7 Drive is packaged with Bypass Control
DriveWizard... Software and Manual…Included on CD ROM with product
Option Instructions… Included on CD ROM with product
Introduction iv
Table of Contents
Quick Reference Parameter List ....................................................... Inside front cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ................................... 1-16
Table of Contents v
F6 Com OPT Setup (applies only to the LonWorks option) .................................. 5-33
Chapter 6 - Diagnostics & Troubleshooting ................................................ 6-1
Table of Contents vi
Appendix B - Capacity Related Parameters ................................................. B-1
Table of Contents vii
Index .............................................................................................................................................. Index-1
Support Services ............................................................................................................. Inside rear cover
Table of Contents viii
Chapter 1
Physical Installation
This chapter describes the requirements for receiving and installing the E7 Drive.
E7 Model Number and Enclosure Style ..................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery...................................................... 1-3
Component Names .................................................................... 1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ............................................ 1-7
Heat Loss Data ........................................................................ 1-11
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ......................... 1-13
Installation Orientation and Clearances ................................... 1-14
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .......................... 1-15
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover...... 1-16
Physical Installation 1 - 1
E7 Model Number and Enclosure Style
Input
Voltage
3-Phase
208-240Vac
208-230Vac
480 Vac
Table 1.1 E7 Model Numbers and Enclosure Style
E7
Model Number
Enclosure Style
CIMR-E7U20P4
CIMR-E7U20P7
CIMR-E7U21P5
CIMR-E7U22P2
CIMR-E7U23P7
CIMR-E7U25P5
CIMR-E7U27P5
CIMR-E7U2011
CIMR-E7U2015
CIMR-E7U2018
CIMR-E7U2022
CIMR-E7U2030
CIMR-E7U2037
CIMR-E7U2045
CIMR-E7U2055
CIMR-E7U2075
CIMR-E7U2090
CIMR-E7U2110
CIMR-E7U40P4
CIMR-E7U40P7
CIMR-E7U41P5
CIMR-E7U42P2
CIMR-E7U43P7
CIMR-E7U45P5
CIMR-E7U47P5
CIMR-E7U49P0
CIMR-E7U4011
CIMR-E7U4015
CIMR-E7U4018
CIMR-E7U4024
CIMR-E7U4030
CIMR-E7U4037
CIMR-E7U4045
CIMR-E7U4055
CIMR-E7U4075
CIMR-E7U4090
CIMR-E7U4110
CIMR-E7U4160
CIMR-E7U4185
CIMR-E7U4220
CIMR-E7U4300
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
NEMA Type 1 (IP20)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Open Chassis (IP00)
7.6
12.5
17.0
21.0
27.0
34.0
40.0
52.0
215.0
312.0
360.0
415.0
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
31.0
46.2
59.4
74.8
88.0
115.0
162.0
192.0
Rated
Output
Current
3.6
4.6
7.8
10.8
16.8
23.0
67.2
77.0
96.0
125.0
156.0
180.0
240.0
304.0
414.0
515.0
675.0
Nominal
Hp
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
125/150
150
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
75
100
125
150
200
250
300/350
400/450
500+
20
25
30
40
50/60
60/75
75
100/125
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
7.5/10
15
Physical Installation 1 - 2
Confirmations upon Delivery
Receiving Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Drive is received.
Item
Has the correct model of Drive been delivered?
Is the Drive damaged in any way?
Are any screws or other components loose?
Table 1.2 Receiving Checks
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Drive.
Reconcile with packing slip and/or order information.
Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive to see if there are any dents, scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Use a screwdriver or other tool to check for tightness.
If there are any irregularities in the above items, contact the shipping company, the distributor or representative who sold the
Drive, or a Yaskawa office immediately.
The E7 is thoroughly tested at the factory. Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier that transported the material. Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty.
After unpacking and inspecting for damage, verify that internal wire connections have not come loose during shipment by spot checking wire terminations with a screwdriver or the appropriate tool.
E7 Drive storage must be in a clean and dry location. Maintain the factory packaging and provide covering as needed to protect the E7 from construction site dirt, water, debris and traffic prior to and during construction.
Nameplate Information
A nameplate is attached to the right side of each Drive. The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive.
Drive Model Number
Revision Code
Weight
Serial Number
UL File Number
Note: The Drive Model Number and Drive Spec Number are required to completely identify a Drive.
Fig 1.1 E7 Drive Nameplate
Physical Installation 1 - 3
Drive Model Numbers
The model number on the nameplate indicates the design specification, voltage, and rating of the Drive in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – E7 U 2 0 11
AC Drive
E7 Family
No.
U
Spec
UL Specification
Rating
No.
2
4
Voltage
3-phase, 208-240Vac
3-phase, 480Vac
Fig 1.2 Drive Model Number Structure
Drive Enclosure and Revision Code
The Drive SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage, Drive rating, enclosure type, and the revision code of the
Drive in alphanumeric codes.
No.
2
4
Voltage
3-phase, 208 - 240Vac
3-phase, 480Vac
Rating
2 011 1 A
No.
0
1
Hardware Revision
Enclosure Type
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
Fig 1.3 SPEC Number Structure
TERMS
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Drive is mounted in a control panel, also called (protected chassis).
NEMA Type 1 (IEC IP20)
The Drive is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a building
(not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA
Type 1 in the USA. All protective covers (Fig 1.4) must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA Type
1 requirements.
Physical Installation 1 - 4
Component Names
Models CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2018 (25HP @ 208V/240V) and 40P4 thru 4018
(30HP @ 480V)
The external appearance, component names, and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1.4. and 1.5.
Top protective cover
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting hole
Diecast Heat Sink
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Drive Appearance
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (Terminal Cover Removed)
Physical Installation 1 - 5
Models CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 (30HP and above @ 208V/240V) and 4030 thru
4300 (40HP and above @ 480V)
The external appearance, component names, and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1.6 and 1.7.
Fig 1.6 Drive Appearance
Charge indicator
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (Terminal Cover Removed)
Ground terminal
Physical Installation 1 - 6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
DIMENSIONS: E7 (NEMA 1)
208/240V (3.6-74.8 AMPS) 480V (1.8- 40.0 AMPS)
FRONT VIEW
MOUNTING HOLES
FOR "A" SIZE SCREW
H2
SIDE VIEW
AIR
(2) HOLES SIZE "J"
.87 DIA.
1.38 DIA.
H1 H
B
C
E
W2 W1
W
AIR
D1
F
BOTTOM VIEW
D
RATED
INPUT
208V
240V
MODEL
CIMR-E7U
20P41
20P71
21P51
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20151
20181
20P41
20P71
21P51
22P21
23P71
27P51
20111
20151
20181
3.6
4.6
7.8
10.8
16.8
23.0
31.0
46.2
59.4
74.8
RATED
OUTPUT
CURRENT
(AMPS)
3.6
4.6
7.8
10.8
16.8
31.0
46.2
59.4
74.8
NOMINAL
HP
3
5
1
2
7.5
10
15
20
25
7.5-10
15
20
25
3
5
1
2
480V
40P41
40P71
41P51
42P21
43P71
45P51
47P51
49P01
40111
40151
40181
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
12.5
17.0
21.0
27.0
34.0
40.0
10
15
20
25
30
1
2
3
5
7.5
FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED.
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
11.22
11.22
11.22
13.19
13.19
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
10.47
11.22
11.22
13.19
13.19
MOUNTING
H1 W1
10.47 4.96
10.47
10.47
10.47
4.96
4.96
4.96
10.47
11.22
11.22
13.19
13.19
4.96
7.32
7.32
8.50
8.50
H W
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.81
12.20
13.78
14.96
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
7.87
7.87
9.45
9.45
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
7.32
7.32
8.50
8.50
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.81
12.20
13.78
14.96
7.87
7.87
9.45
9.45
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
4.96
7.32
7.32
7.32
8.50
8.50
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.02
11.81
11.81
11.81
13.78
13.78
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
5.51
7.87
7.87
7.87
9.45
9.45
IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING
THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM
OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1.2 INCHES ON SIDES AND
5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.30
.30
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.30
.30
H2
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.30
.30
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.47
.47
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.47
.47
W2
.28
.28
.28
.47
.47
.28
.28
.28
.28
---
---
---
---
---
---
4.63
4.63
4.63
5.12
5.12
---
---
---
---
---
---
4.63
4.63
5.12
5.12
B
---
---
---
---
---
4.63
4.63
5.12
5.12
D1
1.54
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.32
2.58
2.58
3.07
3.07
A
#10
#10
#10
#10
#10
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1.54
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.32
2.32
2.58
2.58
3.07
3.07
#10
#10
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
#10
#10
#10
#10
2.32
2.58
2.58
2.58
3.07
3.07
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.32
2.32
#10
#10
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
#10
#10
#10
#10
6.30
6.30
6.30
7.09
7.09
7.09
7.87
7.87
7.87
8.27
8.27
6.30
6.30
6.30
6.30
7.09
7.09
7.87
7.87
8.27
8.27
D
6.30
6.30
6.30
6.30
7.09
7.87
7.87
8.27
8.27
C
3.35
3.35
3.35
3.35
4.14
5.11
5.11
5.79
5.79
E
4.73
4.73
4.73
4.73
5.52
6.21
6.21
6.65
6.65
5.52
6.21
6.21
6.21
6.65
6.65
4.73
4.73
4.73
5.52
5.52
4.73
4.73
4.73
4.73
5.52
5.52
6.21
6.21
6.65
6.65
3.35
3.35
3.35
4.14
4.14
4.14
5.11
5.11
5.11
5.79
5.79
3.35
3.35
3.35
3.35
4.14
4.14
5.11
5.11
5.79
5.79
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
3.07
3.07
3.07
3.94
3.94
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
3.07
3.07
3.94
3.94
F
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
3.07
3.07
3.94
3.94
DR BY
APPVL.
RIP 9.29.04
TA
9.29.04
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.73
1.73
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.38
1.38
1.73
1.73
J
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.10
1.38
1.38
1.73
1.73
APPROX.
W EIGHT
(LBS.)
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
8.8
13.2
15.4
24.2
24.2
6.6
6.6
6.6
8.8
8.8
8.8
13.2
13.2
13.2
22
22
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
8.8
8.8
13.2
15.4
24.2
24.2
Physical Installation 1 - 7
DIMENSIONS: E7 (NEMA 1)
208/240V (88.0-115 AMPS) 480V (52.0-125 AMPS)
CURRENT
Physical Installation 1 - 8
APPROX.
WEIGHT
(LBS.)
DIMENSIONS: E7 (PROTECTED CHASSIS)
FRONT VIEW
MOUNTING HOLES
FOR "A" SIZE SCREW
208-230V (162-415 AMPS)
480V (156-304 AMPS)
H2
AIR
H1 H
W2 W1
W
D
AIR
D1
FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED.
IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING
THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM
OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1.2 I NCHES ON SIDES AND
5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM
RATED
INPUT
MODEL
CIMR-E7U
208V
230V
480V
20370
20450
20550
20750
20900
21100
20370
20450
20750
20900
40750
40900
41100
41600
RATED
OUTPUT
CURRENT
(AMPS)
162
192
215
312
360
415
162
192
312
360
156
180
240
304
NOM.
HP
50
60
MOUNTING
H1 W 1
22.64 9.84
22.64 9.84
75
100
125
150
50-60
75
150
125
150
200
250
27.56
27.56
32.28
33.66
22.64
22.64
100-125 27.56
32.28
27.56
27.56
32.28
33.66
12.80
12.80
14.57
17.52
9.84
9.84
12.80
14.57
12.80
12.80
14.57
17.52
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
W
14.76
14.76
17.72
17.72
19.69
22.64
14.76
14.76
17.72
19.69
17.72
17.72
19.69
22.64
H
23.62
23.62
28.54
28.54
33.46
34.84
23.62
23.62
28.54
33.46
28.54
28.54
33.46
36.06
H2
.49
.49
.49
.49
.59
.59
.49
.49
.49
.59
.49
.49
.59
.59
W 2
2.46
2.46
2.46
2.46
2.56
2.56
2.46
2.46
2.46
2.56
2.46
2.46
2.56
2.56
D
11.81
12.99
13.78
13.78
14.17
14.96
11.81
12.99
13.78
14.17
13.78
13.78
14.17
14.96
D1
3.94
5.12
5.12
5.12
5.12
3.94
5.12
5.12
5.12
5.12
5.51
5.12
5.12
5.51
A
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
APPROX.
W EIGHT
(LBS.)
125
139
189
191
238
330
125
139
191
238
194
196
224
352
DR BY
APPVL.
RIP 9.29.04
TA 9.29.04
Physical Installation 1 - 9
DIMENSIONS: E7 (PROTECTED CHASSIS)
MOUNTING HOLES
FOR "A" SIZE SCREWS
H2
H1 H
AIR
W2 W1
W
W1
D
AIR
D1
RATED
INPUT
MODEL
CIMR-E7U
480V
41850
42200
43000
RATED
OUTPUT
CURRENT
(AMPS)
414
NOM.
HP
300-350
515
675
400-450
500
MOUNTING
H1
50.00
W1
10.63
50.00
56.70
10.63
14.37
H
51.38
51.38
58.07
W
27.95
27.95
36.06
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
H2
.79
.79
.79
W2
3.35
3.35
3.66
D
16.34
16.34
16.34
D1
4.94
4.94
4.94
A
3/8
3/8
3/8
APPROX.
WEIGHT
(LBS.)
572
616
891
FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED.
IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING
THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM
OF FREE AIR OF 1.2 INCHES ON SIDES AND
5 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM
DR BY
RIP 8-02
APPVL.
TBS 9.5.02
Physical Installation 1 - 10
Heat Loss Data
TYPE
CIMR-E7U
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
62
73
82
120
23
29
34
44
140
160
Table 1.3 200V Class Heat Loss Data
Drive
(Inverter)
Capacity
(kVA)
1.4
1.8
3.0
4.1
Rated
Output
Current
(A)
3.6
4.6
7.8
10.8
Cooling
Fin Side
(W)
19
26
48
68
Internal
Unit Side
(W)
39
42
Total
Watt
Loss
(W)
58
68
50 98
59 127
6.4
8.8
12
18
16.8
23
31
46.2
110
164
219
357
74
84
113
168
184
248
332
524
59.4
74.8
88
115
162
192
215
312
360
415
416
472
583
883
1010
1228
1588
1956
2194
2733
182
208
252
333
421
499
619
844
964
1234
597
680
835
1217
1430
1727
2206
2800
3157
3967
Cooling
Method
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Self
Self
Self
Self
Physical Installation 1 - 11
TYPE
CIMR-E7U
4024
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
47P5
49P0
4011
4015
4018
4022
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
180
200
230
315
73
95
120
140
390
510
38
40
51
59
16
21
26
30
Table 1.4 400V Class Heat Loss Data
Drive
(Inverter)
Capacity
(kVA)
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
Rated
Output
Current
(A)
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
Cooling
Fin Side
(W)
14
17
36
59
Internal
Unit Side
(W)
39
41
Total
Watt
Loss
(W)
53
58
48 84
56 115
5.8
6.6
9.5
13
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
80
90
127
193
68
70
81
114
140
160
209
307
21
27
34
40
50.4
52
67.2
77
232
232
296
389
420
691
691
801
158
158
169
201
233
297
297
332
390
390
465
590
653
989
989
1133
240
260
304
414
96
125
156
180
515
675
901
1204
1285
1614
1889
2388
2636
2791
3797
5838
386
478
562
673
847
1005
1144
1328
1712
2482
1287
1682
1847
2287
2736
3393
3936
3964
5509
8319
Cooling
Method
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Self
Self
Self
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan
Physical Installation 1 - 12
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Drive as described below and maintain optimum conditions.
WARNING
The Drive heatsink temperature may exceed 158
°F (70°C). Therefore, mount the Drive to a surface suitable for high temperature.
Installation Site
Locate the E7 Drive as close as possible to the motor. Install the Drive under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree
1 & 2 environments. This excludes wet locations where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contaminant loading.
Type
NEMA Type 1
Open Chassis
Table 1.5 Installation Site Specifications
Ambient Operating Temperature
14
° F
to 104
°F (-10
to + 40
°C)
14
° F
to 113
°F (-10
- to + 45
°C)
95%
95% -
RH
RH -
or or -
-
Humidity less less -
(no
(no -
-
Plenum Rated condensation) Yes condensation) No
Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Drive. It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating a CIMR-E7U2030/4055 Drive and smaller in a panel to obtain the 113
°F (45°C) ambient operating temperature.
Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive:
•
in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust.
•
in an environment where metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials will not get into the Drive enclosure.
•
in a location free from radioactive materials.
•
in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
•
in a location free from excessive vibration.
•
in a location free from chlorides.
•
in a location away from direct sunlight.
•
on a non-combustible surface.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variations. If the Drive is installed in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113
°
F
(45
°C).
Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter
During Drive installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter, such as metal shavings or wire clippings, fall inside the Drive. To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Drive, place a temporary cover over the Drive.
Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before Start-Up. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Drive to overheat.
Physical Installation 1 - 13
Installation Orientation and Clearances
Install the Drive vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency. When installing the Drive, always provide the following installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation. For 3HP, 208V/240V (CIMR-E7U22P2 and below) or 2HP, 480V
(CIMR-E7U41P5 and below), ensure that the heatsink is against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.
4.75 in (120 mm. minimum)
4.75 in (120 mm. minimum)
Air
1.2 in
(30.5 MM.) min.
1.2 in
(30.5 mm. minimum)
4.75 in (50 mm. minimum)
1.2 in
(30.5 mm. minimum)
4.75 in (120 mm. minimum)
Air
Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance
Fig 1.8 Drive Installation Orientation and Clearance
IMPORTANT
1. The same clearance is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and NEMA
Type 1 Drives.
2. Always remove the top and bottom protection covers before installing a CIMR-E7U2018/4018 and smaller Drive in a panel.
Always provide enough clearance for lifting eye bolts and the main circuit wiring when installing a
CIMR-E7U2022/4030 and larger Drive in a panel.
Physical Installation 1 - 14
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to connect cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Models CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2018 (0.5HP to 25HP @ 208V/240V) and 40P4 thru 4018
(0.5HP to 30HP @ 480V)
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2. Refer to Fig 1.9
Models CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 (30HP to 150HP @ 208V/240V) and 4030 thru 4300
(40HP to 500HP @ 480V)
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull down the terminal cover in the direction of arrow
1 and then lift up on the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 2. Refer to Fig 1.10
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover
2
1
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover
Attaching the Terminal Cover
After wiring the terminal block, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Models CIMR-E7U2018/4018 and smaller, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it snaps into place.
For Drives CIMR-E7U2022/4030 and larger, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive, and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the Drive.
Physical Installation 1 - 15
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Models CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2018 (0.5HP to 25HP @ 208V/240V) and 40P4 thru
4018 (0.5HP to 30HP @ 480V)
For Models CIMR-E7U2018/4018 and smaller, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock, then lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1.11.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the direction of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of cover in the direction of arrow
2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1.12.
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover
Attaching the Front Cover
Mount the front cover to the Drive by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1.
Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; this may cause the Digital Operator to malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2.
Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Drive until the front cover snaps into place.
Physical Installation 1 - 16
Models CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 (30HP to 150HP @ 208V/240V) and 4030 thru
4300 (40HP to 500HP @ 480V)
For Models CIMR-E7U2022/4030 and larger, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the
Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure for Models CIMR-E7U2018/4018 and smaller.
Removing the Front Cover
Loosen all screws on the front cover. Lift up at the location labeled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Front Cover
Attaching the Front Cover
Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1.
Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2.
Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it snaps into place on the Drive.
Physical Installation 1 - 17
Attaching the Digital Operator
After attaching the front cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Drive using the following procedure.
1.
Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover by moving in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2.
Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1
2
A
B
Fig 1.14 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, damage to the Digital Operator or Drive may occur.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Drive with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Damage to the Digital Operator may occur. Always attach the front cover to the Drive first, and then attach the Digital
Operator to the front cover.
Physical Installation 1 - 18
Chapter 2
Electrical Installation
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Terminal Block Configuration ..................................................... 2-2
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ................................................... 2-3
Control Wiring........................................................................... 2-12
Electrical Installation 2 - 1
Terminal Block Configuration
The wiring terminals are shown in Fig 2.1.
E(G)
SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V MP AC RP R+ R-
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 FM AC AM IG S+ S-
M5 M6 MA MB MC
M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)
Control circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Models CIMR-_ _ _2018 (25 HP, 208V)/
4018 (30 HP, 480V) and smaller
E(G)
SN SC SP
S1 S2
A1 A2 +V AC
S3 S4 S5 S6
-V
S7
MP
FM
AC RP R+ R-
AC AM IG S+ S-
M5 M6 MA MB MC
M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)
Control circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Ground terminal
Models CIMR-_ _ _2022 (30 HP, 208V)/
4030 (40 HP, 480V) and larger
Fig 2.1 Drive Terminal Configuration
Electrical Installation 2 - 2
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.2.
Table 2.1 208-240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
Nominal
Hp
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Recommended
Wire Size
AWG
(mm
2
)
20P4 0.5/0.75
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
14
(2.1)
20P7 2
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
14
(2.1)
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
15
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
20
25
30
40
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
Electrical Installation 2 - 3
M6
M5
M6
M8
M5
M6
13.3
(1.5)
22.1
(2.5)
22.1
(2.5)
44.3
(5.0)
22.1
(2.5)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
22.1
(2.5)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
45.1
(5.1)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
45.1
(5.1)
88.5
(10.0)
13.3
(1.5)
13.3
(1.5)
13.3
(1.5)
10
(5.3)
8
(8)
6
(13.3)
4
(21.2)
6
(13.3)
6
(13.3)
2
(33.6)
6
(13.3)
4
(21.2)
1
(42.4)
4
(21.2)
4
(21.2)
1/0
(53.5)
4
(21.2)
2
(38)
14
(2.1)
12
(3.3)
10
(5.3)
Wire
Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
Nominal
Hp
50
60
75
75/100
125
150
Table 2.1 208-240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/
l
1,
s
/
l
2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/ r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
l
1,
s
/
l
2
3
l
1,
s
/
l
2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
3
l
1,
s
/
l
2
3
l
1,
s
/
l
2
3
l
1,
s
/
l
2
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
199
(22.5)
88.5
(10.0)
203.6
(23)
12.4
(1.4)
199
(22.5)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
347
(39.2)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
199
(22.5)
88.5
(10.0)
199
(22.5)
199
(22.5)
88.5
(10.0)
199
(22.5)
12.4
(1.4)
88.5
(10.0)
199
(22.5)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
347
(39.2)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
347
(39.2)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
12.4
(1.4)
Recommended
Wire Size
AWG
(mm
2
)
4/0
(100)
4
(22)
2/0
(67.4)
14
(2.1)
300
(152)
4/0 X 2P
(80 X 2P)
3/0 X 2P
(85 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
2/0 X 2P
(67.4 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
250 x2P
(127 x2P)
4/0 X 2P
(107.2 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
4
(21.2)
3/0
(85)
14
(2.1)
1/0 X 2P
(53.5 X 2P)
1/0 X 2P
(53.5 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
4/0
(107.2)
14
(2.1)
2/0 X 2P
(67.4 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
300 X 2P
(152 X 2P)
300 X 2P
152 X 2P
2/0
(67.4)
4/0 X 2P
(107.2 X 2P)
16
(1.25)
* Use 75
°C copper wire or equivalent
Wire
Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Electrical Installation 2 - 4
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
Nominal
Hp
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
49P0/4011
4015
4018
4024/4030
4037
4045
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15/20
25
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
14
(2.1)
Wire Type
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
14
(2.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
14
(2.1)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
13.3
(1.5)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2,
B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
30
40/50
60
75
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
,
1,
B1, B2
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11,
S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11,
S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M6
M5
M6
M6
M8
13.3
(1.5)
13.3
(1.5)
13.3
(1.5)
22.1
(2.5)
22.1
(2.5)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
44.3
(5.0)
21.1
(2.5)
44.3
(5.0)
14
(2)
8
(8)
4
(21.2)
4
(21.2)
2
(33.6)
4
(21.2)
4
(21.2)
6
(13.3)
8
(8)
6
(13.3)
3
(26.7)
6
(13.3)
2
(33.6)
14
(2.1)
14
(2.1)
12
(3.5)
14
(2)
10
(5.5)
12
(3.5)
8
(8)
10
(5.5)
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Electrical Installation 2 - 5
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
Nominal
Hp
4055
4075
4090
4110
4160
100
125
150
200
250
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/
Terminal Symbol
l
1,
s
200/
l l
1,
s
200/
l l
1,
s
200/
l l
1,
s
200/
l
3
2
200,
3
2
200,
3
2
200,
3
2
200,
s
400/
l
2
s
400/
l
2
s
400/
l
2
s
400/
l
2
400
400
400
400
Terminal
Screws
M8
M6
M8
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M12
M8
M12
M4
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
88.5
(10.0)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
347
(39.2)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
199
(22.5)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
44.3
(5.0)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
199
(22.5)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
12.4
(1.4)
347
(39.2)
347
(39.2)
88.5
(10.0)
347
(39.2)
12.4
(1.4)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
2/0
(33.6)
250
(127)
4/0
(107.2)
4/0
(107.2)
2/0
(67.4)
14
(2.1)
2/0 X 2P
(67.4 X
2P)
1/0 X 2P
(53.5 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
4
(21.2)
1
(42.4)
4/0
(107.2)
3/0
(85)
4/0
(107.2)
1/0
(53.5)
14
(2.1)
4/0
(107.2)
14
(2.1)
4/0 X 2P
(107.2 X 2P)
3/0 X 2P
(85 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
1/0 X 2P
(53.5 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
Wire Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
Electrical Installation 2 - 6
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
4185
4220
4300
Nominal
Hp
300/350
400/450
500+
* Use 75
°C copper wire or equivalent.
Table 2.2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 r/
Terminal Symbol
l
1,
s
200/
l l
1,
s
200/
l l
1,
s
200/
l
3
2
200,
3
2
200,
3
2
200,
s
400/
l
2
s
400/
l
2
s
400/
l
2
400
400
400
Terminal
Screws
M8
M8
M8
M16
M4
M8
M8
M8
M16
M4
M8
M8
M8
M8
M16
12.4
(1.4)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
867.4
(98.0)
867.4
(98.0)
12.4
(1.4)
Clamping
Torque lb. in.
(N•m)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
88.5
(10.0)
867.4
(98.0)
12.4
(1.4)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
2/0
(67.4)
250 X 2P
(127 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
700 X 2P
(355 X 2P)
600 X 2P
(304 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
400 X 2P
(203 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
300 X 2P
(152 X 2P)
300 X 2P
(152 X 2P)
2/0
(67.4)
3/0 X 2P
(85 X 2P)
14
(2.1)
500 X 2P
(253 X 2P)
400 X 2P
(203 X 2P)
Wire Type
600Vac
UL Approved vinyl-sheathed
or equivalent
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (
Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Electrical Installation 2 - 7
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.3. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purpose.
Purpose
Table 2.3 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (208-240Vac and 480Vac)
Terminal Designation
Model: CIMR-E7U
_ _ _ _
208-240Vac 480Vac
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Main circuit power input
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2110 4030 to 4300
Drive outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
DC power input
1,
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
DC reactor connection
1, 2
20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Electrical Installation 2 - 8
Main Circuit Configurations 208-240Vac
The 208-240Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
208-240 VAC
CIMR-_ _ _ 20P4 to 2018
(1/2 Hp to 25 Hp)
CIMR-_ _ _ 2022 and 2030
(30 Hp to 40 Hp)
Note
1
{
Notes
1 & 3
{
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-_ _ _ 2037 to 2110
(50 Hp to 150 Hp)
Notes
1 & 3
{
---
Power supply
Control circuits
Note1. Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the wiring, Drive and/or personal injury.
2. Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives.
3. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification.
Electrical Installation 2 - 9
Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac
The 480Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
480 VAC
CIMR-_ _ _ 40P4 to 4018
(1/2 Hp to 30 Hp)
CIMR-_ _ _ 4024 to 4055
(40 Hp to 100 Hp)
Note
1
{
Notes
1 & 3
{
Power supply
Control circuits
Power supply
Control circuits
Notes
1 & 3
{
CIMR-_ _ _ 4075 to 4160 and CIMR-_ _ _ 4185 to 4300
(125 Hp to 500 Hp)
3
Power supply
Control circuits
---
Note1. Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the wiring, Drive and/or personal injury.
2. Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives.
3. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification.
Electrical Installation 2 - 10
Cable Length between Drive and Motor
The E7 should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of load side power cable needed between the Drive and the motor.
If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Drive output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, reduce the cable length whenever possible, or if necessary, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6.
The line side power cables, load side power cables and the control wiring should all be run in a separate conduit. Careful attention to this recommended design practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems.
Motor Cable Length
Table 2.6 Motor Cable Length vs. Carrier Frequency (C6-02)
164 ft. (50m) maximum 328 ft. (100m) maximum More than 328 ft.(100m)
Carrier Frequency 15kHz maximum 10kHz maximum 5kHz maximum
(See the limitations on carrier frequency, based on Drive capacity and model number in Appendix B).
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire:
1.
208-240Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100
Ω.
2.
480Vac Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 10
Ω.
3.
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as motors or large-current electrical equipment.
4.
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Leakage current flows through the Drive. Therefore, if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable.
5.
When using more than one Drive, be careful not to loop the ground wire. See Fig 2.4.
OK
NOT OK
Fig 2.2 Ground Wiring Examples
Control Circuit Ground Terminals
The removable Drive control terminal card provides two ground terminals (marked TB3 and TB4) to accept the control wire shield connection. The control wire shield should be connected on this end only, the opposite end should be isolated with electrical tape.
IMPORTANT
Grounding of the E7 enclosure and motor is required for proper system operation.
Electrical Installation 2 - 11
Control Wiring
Control Circuit Wire Sizes
The auto mode speed reference (speed command) field wiring connection is made to E7 Drive terminals A1 or A2 (signal positive), AC (signal common) and G (shield). Keep this lead length as short as possible to maintain signal quality. Insulated twisted shielded pair wire (2 conductor # 18 ga, Belden 8760 or equivalent) is required. Do not run these wires in the same conduit as other AC power or control wires. The shield must be connected on this end only, stub and isolate the other end. The
A2 signal employed is 4 to 20 mA with parameter H3-08 set for “2: 4 - 20 mA”. For 0 to 10 VDC, parameter H3-08 is set for
“0: 0 - 10 VDC” and the E7 control board DIP switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position. (See Fig 2.4).
For remote operation, keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less. Separate the control wiring from high-power lines
(input power, motor leads or relay sequence circuits) to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices.
When setting speed commands (frequency references) from an external speed potentiometer (and not from the Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E(G), as shown in Fig 2.3. Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.7.
E7
External
Frequency
2k
Ω
A1 0-10VDC (20k
Ω)
A2 H3-08
4-20m A (250K
Ω)
[0 to +10V (20K
Ω)]
(P=Pair)
P P
Signal
0-10Vdc
4-20mA or
0-10Vdc
Terminal Connections
A1 to AC
A2 to AC
Fig 2.3 Analog Input Terminal Configuration
Terminals
Table 2.7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Drives)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque lb-in
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
AWG (mm
2
)
Recommended
Wire Size AWG
(mm
2
)
Wire Type
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7
SN, SC, SP, +V, A1, A2,
AC, MI, M2, M3, M4,
MA, MB, MC, FM, AC,
AM, R+, R-, S+, S-, IG
Phoenix type
*3
4.2 to 5.3
(0.5 to 0.6)
Stranded wire:
26 to 16
(0.14 to 1.5)
18
(0.75)
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
E(G) M3.5
7.0 to 8.8
(0.8 to 1.0)
20 to 14
(0.5 to 2
*2
)
12
(1.25)
*1.
Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external speed command.
*2.
Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
*3.
Yaskawa recommends using a thin-slot screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Electrical Installation 2 - 12
Wiring Checks
After all wiring is completed, perform the following checks:
1.
Is all wiring correct?
2.
Have all wire clippings, screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive enclosure?
3.
Are all terminal screws tight?
Electrical Installation 2 - 13
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The factory default functions of the control circuit terminals for 2-wire control are shown in Table 2.8.
Type
Digital input signals
Analog input signals
Digital output signals
Analog
output signals
RS-485/
422
No.
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
Table 2.8 Control Circuit Terminals
Signal Name
Forward run/stop command
Description
Forward run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
External fault input
Fault reset
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Multi-step speed reference 2
Fault when CLOSED.
Reset when CLOSED
Auxiliary frequency reference when CLOSED.
Multi-step setting 2 when
CLOSED.
Multi-function digital inputs
Functions set by
H1-01 to H1-05.
Jog frequency reference Jog frequency when CLOSED.
Signal Level
24 Vdc, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
S6
S7
SN
SC
SP
+V
A1
A2
AC
E(G)
M1
M2
M3
Digital input common
Refer to Table 2.10 for connection details.
+15Vdc power supply
Analog input or
Speed Command
Multi-function analog input
Analog common
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
+15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters
0 to +10Vdc/100%
4 to 20 mA/100%
0 to +10Vdc/100% (H3-0
–
–
Function set by
H3-09.
During Run
(N.O. contact)
Remote/Auto Operation
(N.O. contact)
CLOSED during operation
CLOSED when local control
Multi-function digital output
Function set by
H2-01.
Multi-function digital output
Function set by
H2-02.
M4
MA
MB
MC
Fault output signal
(SPDT)
MA/MC: CLOSED during fault condition
MB/MC: OPEN during fault condition
FM Multi-function analog output
(output frequency)
0 to +10Vdc/100% frequency
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Function set by
H4-01
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
AC Analog common –
AM Multi-function analog output
(output current)
0 to +10Vdc/100% Drive's rated output current
Modbus communication input
Modbus communication output
Signal common
For 2-wire RS-485, jumper R+ and S+ and
jumper R- and S-.
-
Multi-function analog monitor 2
Function set by
H4-04
+15Vdc
(Max. current: 20 mA)
0 to +10 V(20 k
Ω)
4 to 20 mA(250
Ω)
0 to +10 V(20k
Ω)
–
–
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250Vac
1 A max. at 30Vdc
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250Vac
1 A max. at 30Vdc
0 to +10Vdc max. ±5%
2 mA max.
Differential input,
PHC isolation
Differential input,
PHC isolation
-
Electrical Installation 2 - 14
DIP Switch S1
DIP Switch S1 is described in this section. The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2.9.
S1
1
1
2
DIP Switch S1 located on terminal board.
Terminating resistance
Fig 2.4 DIP Switch S1 Location
Name
S1-1
S1-2
Table 2.9 DIP Switch S1
Function
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Input method for analog input A2
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110
Ω
Factory Default = OFF
OFF: 0-10 Vdc (internal resistance: 20K
Ω)
ON: 4-20mA (internal resistance: 250
Ω)
Factory Default = ON
Electrical Installation 2 - 15
Shunt Connector CN15
The shunt connector CN15 is described in this section. Shunt connector along with parameters H4-07 and H4-08 select the signal range of the analog output terminals FM and AM.
Shunt connector CN15 is only available when the optional Terminal Card with the 4-20mA Analog Output Monitor is installed
(Model No. ETC618120). See Chapter 7, Maintenance, for installation of the optional Terminal Card.
The function of various shunt connector CN15 configurations is shown in Table 2.10.
Fig 2.5 Shunt Connector CN15 Location
CN15
Table 2.10 Shunt Connector CN15 Configuration Options
Analog Output Monitor Configurations
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1) and AM-AC (CH2)
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
Current Output (4-20mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH1)
Voltage Output (0-10Vdc) for terminals AM-AC (CH2)
The software configuration for the analog output monitor signal type is listed below:
Parameter
No.
H4-07
H4-08
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Terminal FM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select1
Terminal AM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select2
Description
0: 0 - 10 V
2: 4-20 mA
0: 0 - 10 V
2: 4-20 mA
Electrical Installation 2 - 16
Setting
Range
0 or 2
Factory
Setting
0
Menu
Location
Programming
0 or 2 0 Programming
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0V common) and sourcing mode (+24V common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply can also be connected, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
(Factory Default)
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
Electrical Installation 2 - 17
Terminal Connections
Connections to Drive terminals are shown in Fig 2.6.
24
Fig 2.6 Terminal Connections
Electrical Installation 2 - 18
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits:
1.
Separate control wiring from power/motor wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , 1, 2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
2.
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, and M4 (digital outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
3.
If using an optional external power supply, ensure it is a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
4.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Prepare cable ends as shown in Fig 2.7.
5.
Connect the shield wire to terminal E(G).
6.
Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath
Insulation
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal E(G) at Drive
Insulate with tape
Fig 2.7 Preparing the Termination of Shielded Twisted-pair Cables
Electrical Installation 2 - 19
Field Wiring Diagram
Use this diagram to document field wiring. It may be helpful to copy this page.
Fig 2.8 Field Wiring Diagram
Electrical Installation 2 - 20
Chapter 3
Digital Operator
This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display ............................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys................................................................. 3-3
Drive Mode Indicators ................................................................ 3-5
Drive Main Menu........................................................................ 3-7
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-) ................................................ 3-12
Programming Menu (-ADV-) .................................................... 3-13
Example of Changing a Parameter.......................................... 3-15
Digital Operator 3 - 1
Digital Operator Display
The Digital Operator is used for programming, operating, and monitoring drive operation. By default the E7 Drive will not run unless the digital operator is securely attached to the Drive.
The various items included on the Digital Operator are described below.
Menu Display
See Table 3.7
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 60.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Drive Mode Indicators
See Table 3.2
Ready Display
Drive can operate when a drive command is input
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers and settings
1 line x 13 characters
3 lines x 16 characters
Key Descriptions
See Table 3.1
RUN & STOP Indicators
See Tables 3.5 and 3.6
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
WARNING
The digital operator can be used to operate (start) the Drive. Incorrect programming and/or improper key selection on the digital operator may result in the Drive starting unexpectedly. Prior to making any adjustments with the digital operator, insure that all personnel are clear from the Drive, motor, and machine. Also, insure that all covers, couplings, pulleys, shaft keys, etc. are secure.
Digital Operator 3 - 2
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Key Name
AUTO Key
Table 3.1 Digital Operator Keys
Function
•
Pressing the AUTO key will put the Drive in the “Auto” mode.
• In the “Auto” mode, the Drive will be capable of starting/stopping depending on the setting of parameter “b1-02” (Run Command Selection).
•
In the “Auto” mode, the Drive speed command (frequency reference) will depend on the setting of parameter “b1-01” (Frequency Reference Selection).
•
If the OFF key is pressed, the “Auto” mode frequency reference will continue to be displayed on the keypad.
•
Pressing the AUTO key will start the Drive if the run command is already closed.
•
If the Drive is running in the “Auto” mode and the OFF key is pressed, the Drive will stop. If the run command remains closed, pressing the AUTO key will restart the Drive.
•
While the Drive is running, the run command can be opened to stop and closed to restart without taking the Drive out of the “Auto” mode.
•
The Drive must be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to “Auto” or
“Hand” mode, unless b1-13=1.
MENU Key Scrolls through the five main menus.
ESCAPE Key Returns to the previous display, before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
MONITOR Key
Selects the monitor mode from the Operation (-DRIVE-), Quick Setting (-QUICK-),
Programming (-ADV-) and Modified Constants (-VERIFY-) menus.
INCREASE Key
Increases parameter numbers and set values.
Used to move to the next item or data value.
DECREASE Key
Decreases parameter numbers and set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data value.
SHIFT/RESET Key
Selects the digit to be changed. The selected digit will blink.
Also resets the Drive when a fault has occurred.
DATA/ENTER Key Pressed to enter menus and parameters as well as to set values.
Digital Operator 3 - 3
Key Name
HAND Key
Table 3.1 Digital Operator Keys
Function
• Pressing the HAND key will put the Drive in the “Hand” mode and start the
Drive.
• In the “Hand” mode, the drive speed command will depend on the setting of parameter “b1-12” (Hand Frequency Reference Selection).
• If the OFF key is pressed, the “Hand” mode speed command will continue to be displayed on the keypad.
• The Drive must to be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to
“Hand” or “Auto” mode, unless b5-13=1.
OFF Key
Stops Drive operation, following the stopping method as programmed in parameter b1-03.
Digital Operator 3 - 4
Drive Mode Indicators
The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3.2.
Indicator
Table 3.2 Drive Mode Indicators
Definition
FWD
REV
Lit when a forward run command is input and when Drive is in “Hand” Mode.
Lit when a reverse run command is input.
AUTO SEQ Lit when set up for remote run command. See Table 3.3
AUTO REF Lit when set up for remote speed command. See Table 3.4
ALARM Lit when a fault has occurred. Flashes when an alarm has occurred.
AUTO Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
The status of the AUTO “Sequence” (SEQ) indicator is shown in Table 3.3. This indicator is always “Off” when the Drive is in the “Hand” mode. When the Drive is in the “Auto” mode, the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter
“b1-02” (Run Command Selection).
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.3 AUTO Sequence (SEQ) Indicator
Hand Mode Auto Mode
N/A
Parameter “b1-02” (Run Command Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, or an option board as indicated below: b1-02=1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
Parameter “b1-02” (Run Command Selection) is set to digital operator as indicated below: b1-02=0 (Operator)
Digital Operator 3 - 5
AUTO Reference (REF) Indicator
The status of the AUTO “Reference” (REF) indicator is shown in Table 3.4. This indicator is always “Off” when the Drive is in the “Hand” mode. When the Drive is in the “Auto” mode, the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter
“b1-01” (Frequency Reference Selection).
Indicator Status
On
Off
Table 3.4 AUTO Reference (REF) Indicator
Hand Mode
N/A
Auto Mode
Parameter “b1-01” (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to terminal strip, communications, or an option board as indicated below: b1-01=1 (Terminals)
=2 (Communications)
=3 (Option PCB)
Parameter “b1-01” (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to digital operator as indicated below: b1-01=0 (Operator)
Run Indicator
The status of the “RUN” indicator is shown in Table 3.5 when the Drive is in either the “Hand” or “Auto” mode.
Table 3.5 RUN Indicator
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Off
Condition
Drive is running
Drive is decelerating to a stop
Drive is stopped
Stop Indicator
The status of the “STOP” indicator is shown in Table 3.6 when the Drive is in either the “Hand” or “Auto” mode.
Indicator Status
On
Blinking
Off
Table 3.6 STOP Indicator
Condition
Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped
Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is zero or
Drive is running in “Auto” mode and OFF has been pressed
Drive is running
Digital Operator 3 - 6
Drive Main Menu
The Drive’s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into menu groups that make it easier to read and set parameters. The Drive is equipped with five menu selections. The five selections and their primary functions are shown in
Table 3.7 and are directly available by pressing the MENU key.
Table 3.7 Drive Main Menu
Main Menu
Operation
- DRIVE -
Primary Function(s)
The Drive can be run in this menu.
Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current, displaying fault history or displaying the fault traces.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the most commonly used parameters.
Quick Setting
- QUICK -
Programming
- ADV -
Modified Constants
- VERIFY -
Auto-Tuning
- A.TUNE -
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read every parameter.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to auto-tune the Drive in order to optimize motor performance as well as utilize the bi-directional speed search feature.
Digital Operator 3 - 7
Main Menu Structure
The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display. While viewing the menu selection display, press the MENU key repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections.
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
-QUICK-
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
-VERIFY-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Modified Consts
1
-A.TUNE-
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-Tuning
Fig 3.2 Main Menu Structure
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection.
1
Modified Consts = Modified Parameters
Digital Operator 3 - 8
Operation Menu (-DRIVE-)
This menu is used for setting a speed command or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current. It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces. The Drive must be in this menu in order to run, see parameter b1-08.
IMPORTANT
Leaving the Drive in a menu other than the Operation Menu, will prohibit the Drive from running. While running, if the Drive is in a menu other than “Operation” and the run command is removed and re-applied, the Drive will stop and will not start until the Operation Menu is selected.
U1 Monitor List
Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.3) to access the Operation Menu:
x1
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
Fig 3.3 U1 Monitor List Access Procedure
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
Use and keys to scroll through the U1 “Monitor” parameter list. See Appendix A for functional description.
Table 3.8 U1 Monitor List
Monitor
U1-01 Frequency Ref
U1-02 Output Freq
U1-03 Output Current
U1-06 Output Voltage
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage
U1-08 Output kWatts
U1-10 Input Term Sts
Monitor
U1-20 SFS Output (Soft Starter Signal)
U1-24 PI Feedback
U1-28 CPU ID
U1-29 kWh
U1-30 MWh
U1-34 OPE Detected
U1-36 PI Input
U1-11 Output Term Sts
U1-12 Int Ctl Sts 1
U1-13 Elapsed Time
U1-14 FLASH ID
U1-37 PI Output
U1-38 PI Setpoint
U1-39 Transmit Err
U1-40 FAN Elapsed Time
U1-15 Term A1 Level U1-51 Auto Mode Fref
U1-16 Term A2 Level U1-52 Hand Mode Fref
U1-18 Mot SEC Current (Secondary Current) U1-53 PI Feedback 2
Digital Operator 3 - 9
U2 Fault Trace List
After viewing the “Monitor” parameter list, in order to view the “Fault Trace” parameter list, follow the key operations below
(Fig 3.4).
-DRIVE- Rdy
Monitor
U1 -01= 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace
U2 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00Hz
Fig 3.4 U2 Fault Trace List Access Procedure
-DRIVE- Rdy
Current Fault
U201 = None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00Hz
Use and keys to scroll through the U2 “Fault Trace” parameter list.
Table 3.9 U2 Fault Trace List
Fault Trace Parameters
U2-01 Current Fault
U2-02 Last Fault
U2-03 Frequency Ref
U2-04 Output Freq
U2-05 Output Current
U2-07 Output Voltage
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage
U2-09 Output kWatts
U2-11 Input Term Sts
U2-12 Output Term Sts
U2-13 AC Drive Status
U2-14 Elapsed Time
Digital Operator 3 - 10
U3 Fault History List
After viewing the “Fault Trace” parameter list, in order to view the “Fault History” parameter list, follow the key operations below Fig 3.5).
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace
U2 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U2-02= None
U2-03= 0.00A
-DRIVE- Rdy
Fault History
U3 -01= None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U3-02= None
U3-03= None
-DRIVE- Rdy
Last Fault
U301 = None
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U3-02= None
U3-03= None
Fig 3.5 U3 Fault History Access Procedure
Use and keys to scroll through the U3 “Fault History” parameter list.
Table 3.10 Fault History List
Fault History Parameters
U3-01 Last Fault
U3-02 Fault Message 2
U3-03 Fault Message 3
U3-04 Fault Message 4
U3-05 Elapsed Time 1
U3-06 Elapsed Time 2
U3-07 Elapsed Time 3
U3-08 Elapsed Time 4
U3-09 Fault Message 5
U3-10 Fault Message 6
U3-11 Fault Message 7
U3-12 Fault Message 8
U3-13 Fault Message 9
U3-14 Fault Message 10
U3-15 Elapsed Time 5
U3-16 Elapsed Time 6
U3-17 Elapsed Time 7
U3-18 Elapsed Time 8
U3-19 Elapsed Time 9
U3-20 Elapsed Time 10
Digital Operator 3 - 11
Quick Setting Menu (-QUICK-)
This menu is used to set/read the most commonly used parameters in the Drive. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.6) to access the Quick Setting Menu: x2
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
-QUICK-
Reference Source
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B1-01= 1
*1*
Terminals
“1”
Fig 3.6 Quick Setting Parameter Access Procedure
Use and keys to scroll through the “Quick Setting” parameter list.
Table 3.11 Quick Setting Parameter List
Parameter
Number b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b5-01 b5-02* b5-03* b5-31*
C1-01
C1-02 d2-01 d2-02
E1-01
E2-01
H3-08*
H3-09*
H3-13*
Parameter Name
Frequency Reference Selection
Run command Selection
Stopping Method Selection
PI Mode Selection
Proportional Gain Setting
Integral Time Setting
PI Unit Selection
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Input Voltage Setting
Motor Rated Current
Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection
Auxiliary Terminal Function Selection
Master/Frequency Reference Terminal Selection
* This parameter’s menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
Digital Operator 3 - 12
Programming Menu (-ADV-)
This menu is used to set/read every parameter in the Drive. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.7) to access the Programming Menu.
x3
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A1 -00= 0
Select Language
Fig 3.7 Programming Menu Access Procedure
Use , see appendix A.
, and keys to scroll through the “Programming” parameter group list. For complete parameter listing
Table 3.12 Programming
Parameter Group List
Parameter Group Functions
A1 Initialization
A2 User Parameters b1 Sequence b2 DC Braking b3 Speed Search b4 Delay Timers b5 PI Control b8 Energy Saving
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec
C4 Torque Comp
C6 Carrier Freq d1 Preset Reference d2 Reference Limits d3 Jump Frequencies d4 Sequence
E1 V/F Pattern
E2 Motor Setup
F6 Com OPT Setup
H1 Digital Inputs
H2 Digital Outputs
H3 Analog Inputs
H4 Analog Outputs
H5 Serial Com Setup
L1 Motor Overload
L2 PwrLoss Ridethru
L3 Stall Prevention
L4 Ref Detection
L5 Fault Restart
L6 Torque Detection
L8 Hdwe Protection n1 Hunting Prev n3 High Slip o1 Monitor Select o2 Key Selections o3 COPY Function
Digital Operator 3 - 13
Modified Constants Menu (-VERIFY-)
This menu is used to set/read the parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.8) to access the Modified Constants Parameter Menu.
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Modified Consts x4
Fig 3.8 Modified Constants Menu Access Procedure
Note 1: If there are not any parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings, then the display will state “None Modified”. Otherwise, use the “increase” and “decrease” keys to scroll through the “Modified
Constants” list.
Auto-Tuning Menu (-A.TUNE-)
This menu is used to auto-tune the Drive in order to optimize motor performance as well as utilize the bi-directional speed search feature. Follow the key operations below (Fig 3.9) to access the Auto-Tuning Menu.
x5
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-Tuning
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
T102 = 0.40kW
(0.00~650.00)
“0.40kW”
Fig 3.9 Auto-Tuning Menu Access Procedure
Use and keys to scroll through the “Auto-Tuning” parameter list.
Table 3.13 Auto-Tuning
Parameter List
Auto-Tuning Parameters
T1-02 Mtr Rated Power
T1-04 Rated Current
Digital Operator 3 - 14
Example of Changing a Parameter
Table 3.14 provides an example of how to change parameter “C1-02” (Deceleration Time 1) from 30 seconds to 40 seconds.
Step
Number
Table 3.14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu
Digital Operator Display Description
1
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
The Drive is first powered up.
2
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Operation” menu.
3
4
5
6
7
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Quick Setting
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A1 -01= 0
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1 -01= 1.0sec
Accel Time 1
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Quick Setting” menu.
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Programming” menu.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter “Programming” menu.
Press the INCREASE key until C1-01 (Accel/Decel) is displayed.
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C101 = 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move flashing digit to the right.
Digital Operator 3 - 15
Step
Number
Table 3.14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu
Digital Operator Display Description
8
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C102 = 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the INCREASE key to display C1-02 (Decel Time 1).
9
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 0 030.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access setting display.
10
11
12
13
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 0 0 30.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 00 3 0.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C1-02= 00 4 0.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the SHIFT/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the set data. “Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1.0 sec after the data setting has been confirmed.
14
15
16
-ADV-
Decel Time 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C102
40.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
“30.0sec”
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operation
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 0.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
The monitor display for C1-02 returns.
Press the MENU key to scroll to “Operation” menu.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter “Operation” menu.
Digital Operator 3 - 16
Chapter 4
Start Up
This chapter describes the procedures to prepare the Drive for start up and the procedures to conduct a Drive start up.
Drive Start Up Preparation......................................................... 4-2
Drive Start Up Procedures ......................................................... 4-5
Start Up 4 - 1
Start Up
In order to provide the most reliable Drive available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage, an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure. Please complete the following checklist and maintain it in a secure location as technical service personnel may request information from this checklist.
Drive Start Up Preparation
Date:
Start Up Person:
Company Name: _________________________________
Sales Order #: ___________________________________
Printed Name: ___________________________________
Phone #: _______________________________________
Owners Representative:
Printed Name: ___________________________________
Company: ______________________________________
Start Up Location: _________________________________
Serial #: ________________________________________
Drive Location: ___________________________________
Signature: ________________________________________
Phone #: _________________________________________
Signature: ________________________________________
Step
1. The Drive is thoroughly tested at the factory. The start up person should verify that the drive is free of shipping and installation damage. Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty. Claims must be filed with the shipping company as soon as possible for any potential recovery via insurance.
2. Review the E7 User Manual (TM.E7.01) shipped with the Drive.
3. Verify that the model number and voltage ratings in the purchase order match the nameplate data for each unit.
4. Location of the Drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life. The unit should be installed in an area where it is protected from:
Direct sunlight, rain or moisture
Corrosive gases or liquids
Vibration, airborne dust or metallic particles
5.
Ensure the Drive is on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation (4.75” above and below, 1.2” on each side). Refer to Fig 1.8.
6.
Verify that the proper branch circuit protection is installed in front of the Drive. Refer to Appendix E - Peripheral
Devices for proper input fuse or circuit breaker sizing.
Start Up 4 - 2
7.
Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit.
8.
Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise.
9.
Never allow wire leads to touch metal surfaces. Short-circuit may result.
10. Never connect AC main power to output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
11. Never connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the Drive output.
12. Use 600Vac vinyl-sheathed wire or equivalent. Wire size should be determined considering voltage drop of leads.
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (
Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10 -3
13. It is recommended that the motor lead length not exceed 164 feet (50 meters) and motor wiring be run in a separate conduit from the power wiring. If lead length must exceed this distance, reduce the carrier frequency (See Table 2.6) and consult Yaskawa toll free at 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) for other motor protection measures.
14. Signal and control leads must be separated from main circuit leads (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
15. Determine proper wire size for power and motor leads. Refer to Tables 2.1 and 2.2 for details.
16. Review proper ground connections for the Drive. Refer to Chapter 2 – Electrical Installation for details. The Drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal. Ground resistance should be less than 100
Ω for a
208-240Vac Drive. Ground resistance should be less than 10
Ω for a 480Vac Drive. Select wire size suitable for the size of terminal screw. Make the length as short as possible.
Never ground the drive in common with welding machines, motors or other large-current electrical equipment.
Where several Drives are used, ground each Drive directly or daisy-chain to the ground pole(s).
DO NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS. See Fig 2.4.
17. Review terminal functions of signal and control circuits. Refer to Table 2.8.
18. Verify if any customer safety devices are required (e.g. firestat, freezestat, high static pressure).
19. Record the following motor nameplate information:
Voltage: _____________________Motor Rated Amps: ____________________
20. Verify that the commercial power supply is within the rated Drive input voltage:
Power Supply: ____________________VAC Drive Input Voltage: ____________________VAC
21. Verify that the leads in the 3-Phase electric motor conduit box are configured for the proper voltage.
22. Ensure Motor Rated Current is less than or equal to Drive Output Amps. If multiple motors are being used, make sure that the Motor Rated Current sum is less than or equal to Drive Output Amp rating. Please note that if multiple motors are being operated from one Drive, each motor must have its own overload and short circuit protection.
Start Up 4 - 3
23. Wire all necessary power leads to the Drive. DO NOT CONNECT MOTOR TO DRIVE YET.
24. Wire all necessary ground wires to the Drive.
25. Wire all necessary control wires to the Drive.
26. Ensure that the power leads are connected to the R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 terminals in the Drive.
27. Tighten all of the three-phase power and ground connections. Please check that all control and signal terminations are tight.
28. Inspect the control circuit connections (including the shield) and determine if a motor “safety circuit” is connected.
If normally closed, these contacts may be wired in series with the RUN command contacts, which are between terminals S1 and SN of the Drive. No special programming is required. Refer to Chapter 2 – Electrical Installation
(Fig 2.7).
Alternately, these contacts could be wired between terminals S3 and SN as External Fault Inputs, and may be either normally closed or normally open contacts.
29. Record any other connections to the Drive using the blank terminal connection drawing in Chapter 2 – Electrical
Installation (Fig 2.7) to determine if special programming is required for the following:
•Multi-function Inputs – refer to Appendix A – Parameter List
•Multi-function Outputs – refer to Appendix A – Parameter List
•Multi-function Digital Inputs – refer to Appendix A – Parameter List
•Multi-function Analog Outputs – refer to Appendix A – Parameter List
•Serial Communications – refer to Appendix A – Parameter List
THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PREPARATION.
Start Up 4 - 4
Drive Start Up Procedures
1.
Confirm that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the Drive being set up.
Measure the voltage on the line side of the Drives Molded Case Circuit Breaker/disconnect and record below.
Table 4.1 Input Voltage Check
Measurement Location
L1 – L2
L2 – L3
L1 – L3
Voltage (Vac)
WARNING
Use extreme caution when performing measurements as contact with live parts may result in personal injury or death.
2.
If voltage level is within Drive Specification (See Appendix C - Specification), APPLY POWER to energize the
Drive. The STOP, AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators should be on.
3.
REMOVE POWER from the Drive. Wait for the Red CHARGE LED (near the power terminals) to go out.
WARNING
The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The status indicator LED’s and the digital operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below 50VDC. To prevent electric shock, wait at least 5 minutes after all indicators are off and measure the DC Bus voltage level to confirm a safe level prior to working on the Drive.
4.
Connect the motor leads to the Drive at terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3.
5.
APPLY POWER to the Drive.
6.
Press the HAND key once. This puts the Drive in the Hand Mode, allowing run/stop and speed commands (frequency references) by the digital operator. The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off. The FWD light turns on.
The RUN light turns on. The STOP light is blinking. “Frequency Ref” (U1-01) is now displayed on the Digital Operator.
7.
Press the OFF key.
8.
Press the MENU key two times. Press the DATA/ENTER key once to enter the Quick Setting Menu. Press the T key 25 times to display parameter E1-01 “Input Voltage”. This parameter selects the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive. To set this parameter for the application. Press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the
S,T, and X keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter per the application.
Start Up 4 - 5
Parameter
No.
E1-01
Table 4.2 Input Voltage Setting
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Setting Range
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
155.0 to 255.0
(208-240Vac)
310.0 to 510.0
(480Vac)
Factory Setting
240.0
(208-240Vac)
480.0
(480Vac)
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” briefly appears and the display is now no longer flashing.
9.
Press the S key once to display E2-01 “Motor Rated FLA”.
This parameter is the foundation of motor protection. It can be entered when auto-tuning is performed. Set this parameter according to the motor rated current (FLA). Press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the S,▼, and X keys to adjust E2-01 to the motor rated full load amps.
Parameter
No.
E2-01
Table 4.3 Motor Rated Current
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
kVA
Dependent kVA
Dependent
Menu
Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the value in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” briefly appears and your display is now flashing.
10. Press the ESC once. Press DATA/ENTER once. Press S key twice to display b1-02 “Run Source”. This parameter selects where the Drive will receive the run command. Press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the
S or ▼ keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter for the application.
Parameter
No.
b1-02
Table 4.4 Run Command Selection
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Setting Choices
Setting
Range
Run Command Selection
Run Source
0: Operator
1: Terminals
2: Serial Com
3: Option PCB
0 - 3
Factory
Setting
1
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” briefly appears and the display is now not flashing.
11. Press the
▼ key once to display b1-01 “Reference Source”. This parameter selects where the Drive will receive the speed command. Press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the S or ▼ keys and the DATA/ENTER key to set this parameter for the application.
Start Up 4 - 6
Parameter
No.
b1-01
Table 4.5 Speed Command Selection
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Setting
Choices
0: Operator
1: Terminals
2: Serial Com
3: Option PCB
Setting
Range
0 - 3
Factory
Setting
1
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” briefly appears and the display is now not flashing.
12. Press the S key twice to display b1-03 “Stopping Method”.
This parameter selects the stopping method used when a stop command is given to the Drive.
Parameter
No.
b1-03
Table 4.6 Stopping Method Selection
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Setting Choices
Setting
Range
Stopping Method Selection
Stopping Method
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DCInj to Stop
3: Coast w/Timer
0 - 3
Factory Setting
0
Menu Location
Quick Setting or
Programming
Press the DATA/ENTER key once. Use the S or ▼ keys to select the stopping method. Ensure the DATA/ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive. “Entry Accepted” briefly appears and the display is not flashing.
13. Press the MENU key once to display “Operation”.
14. Press the DATA/ENTER key once to display “Frequency Ref”.
15. The STOP and FWD lights are on.
16. Press the DATA/ENTER key once to enable entering of a speed command in U1-01. Use the Sand ▼ keys to set a speed command of 6.00Hz.
17. Press the HAND key once to start the motor and verify correct motor rotation for the application. The RUN light turns on and the STOP light turns off.
If the direction of motor rotation is wrong, press the OFF key. The RUN light turns off and the STOP light turns on.
REMOVE POWER from the Drive. Wait for the Red CHARGE LED (near the power terminals) to go out. When it does, swap the motor wires connected to terminals U/T1 & V/T2 in the Drive. Be sure to re-tighten the terminal lugs.
APPLY POWER.
To verify the motor rotation is now correct for the application, press the HAND key once to start the motor and turn off the AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF lights. The FWD light turns on and the motor will rotate at the speed entered in step 16.
Start Up 4 - 7
18. Press the MONITOR key to display the U1 monitors. Use the S and ▼ keys to view Output Current (U1-03),
Output Voltage (U1-06), and DC Bus Voltage (U1-07) while running the Drive throughout its entire speed range.
Record the following information at each speed:
Frequency
(Hz)
Monitor U1-01
6.0
10.0
50.0
55.0
60.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
45.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
Output Current
(A)
Monitor U1-03
Output Voltage
(VAC)
Monitor U1-06
DC Bus Voltage
(VDC)
Monitor U1-07
When this table is complete, press the OFF key. The Drive will stop and the FWD light remains on. This step provides benchmark data for the application from the initial start up.
19. Press the MENU key once to display “Operation”. Press the DATA/ENTER key to display “Frequency Ref”.
If using a remote speed command, press the AUTO key so the AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators are on. This puts the Drive in Auto mode.
20. If using an external speed command, determine whether the speed command is a 0-10Vdc or a 4-20mA signal.
Connect the positive side of a 0-10Vdc signal to terminal A1. Connect the positive side of a 4-20mA signal to terminal A2. Connect the COMMON of the speed command to terminal AC.
Note: Connect only one input. The factory default is 0-10Vdc. To change to 4-20mA adjust parameter H3-08 to “2:4 – 20mA” and ensure DIP Switch S1-2 (located on the terminal board) is in the ON position.
Start Up 4 - 8
21. Check the signal for proper polarity. Observe if the speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired. If not, perform the following:
For 0-10Vdc input (Terminal A1)
1.
With no input, adjust Bias (H3-03 setting) until an output of “0.0 Hz” is obtained.
2.
With full-scale input, adjust Gain (H3-02 setting) until an output of “60.0 Hz” (or other desired maximum frequency) is obtained.
For 4-20mA input (Terminal A2)
1.
With 4mA input, adjust Bias (H3-11 setting) until an output of “0.0 Hz” is obtained.
2. With 20 mA input, adjust Gain (H3-10 setting) until an output of “60.0 Hz”
(or other desired maximum frequency) is obtained.
THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PROCEDURE.
Start Up 4 - 9
Notes:
Start Up 4 - 10
Chapter 5
Basic Programming
This Manual contains descriptions of all user accessible parameters contained in the Drive.
Parameters are listed in alpha-numerical order. Parameter number and name, along with a detailed description and its settings are described on the following pages.
A1 Initialization........................................................................... 5-2 b1 Sequence.............................................................................. 5-4 b2 DC Braking.......................................................................... 5-10 b3 Speed Search ..................................................................... 5-12 b5 PI Function.......................................................................... 5-16 b8 Energy Savings ................................................................... 5-25
C1 Accel/Decel ........................................................................ 5-26 d2 Reference (Speed Command) Limits.................................. 5-27 d3 Jump Frequencies............................................................... 5-28
E1 V/f Pattern........................................................................... 5-29
E2 Motor Setup ........................................................................ 5-32
F6 Com OPT Setup (applies only to the LonWorks option) ..... 5-33
H3 Analog Inputs ..................................................................... 5-34
L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Function........................ 5-40
L3 Stall Prevention ................................................................... 5-41
L4 Speed Command Loss Detection ....................................... 5-45
L5 Fault Restart ....................................................................... 5-46
L6 Torque Detection................................................................. 5-48
L8 Hardware Protection ........................................................... 5-50 o1 Monitor Configuration.......................................................... 5-52 o2 Key Selections .................................................................... 5-56 o3 Digital Operator Copy Function........................................... 5-58
T1 Auto-Tuning......................................................................... 5-61
Programming 5 - 1
E7 Basic Programming Parameters
The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial set-up of the Drive. Parameters involving the display language, access levels, initialization and password are located in this group.
A1 Initialization
A1-00 Select Language
Setting
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
Description
English (factory default)
Japanese
Deutsch
Francais
Italiano
Espanol
Portugues
The setting of parameter A1-00 determines which international language the Drive will use to display non-numerical text. The
A1-00 parameter will not be changed by an Initialization of the drive (A1-03= “1110: User Initialize”, “2220: 2-Wire Initial”, or “3330: 3-Wire Initial”).
If the Drive is accidentally set to a language unfamiliar to the operator, locating the parameter to change the operator language can be done by performing the following:
1.
Press the MENU key until the “-ADV-” MENU is shown in the upper left corner of the digital operator.
2.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the programming menu. The first parameter shown is A1-00 (Select Language).
3.
Press the DATA/ENTER key again and use the INCREASE and DECREASE arrow keys to choose the preferred language from the list below:
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : Deutsch (German)
3 : Francais (French)
4 : Italiano (Italian)
5 : Español (Spanish)
6 : Portugues (Portuguese)
A1-01 Access Level Selection
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Operation Only
User Level
Advanced Level (factory default)
A1-01 can be used to allow access to and permission to change all Drive parameters. If the Drive is programmed for Operation
Only (A1-01= “0: Operation Only”), then only the OPERATION and the PROGRAMMING menus are accessible. Within the
PROGRAMMING menu only parameters A1-01 and A1-04 are adjustable.
Programming 5 - 2
If A1-01 is configured for Advanced Access (A1-01= “2: Advanced Level”), then all menus and all parameters are shown. If the
Access Level Selection is set to Advanced, all parameters should be adjustable unless:
1.
The Drive parameters are password protected (A1-04) which will prevent access to A1-00 through A1-03 and all A2 parameters.
2.
A digital input has been configured as a Program Lockout (H1-0X= 1B) is active.
3.
During serial communication writing, if a parameter change is also attempted via the digital operator, a
“BUSY - WRITE PROTECTED” message will display. Parameter change will not be possible from the digital operator until an Enter command is received via the serial communication to finish the serial writing process.
A1-03 Initialize Parameters
Setting
0
1110
2220
3330
Description
No Initialize (factory default)
User Initialize
2-Wire Initialize
3-Wire Initialize
The Drive can be set back to one of three default states via the A1-03 parameter.
1.
User Initialization – 1110: The modified Drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings. User settings are stored when parameter o2-03= “1: Set Defaults”.
2.
2-Wire Initialization – 2220: The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward Run and Reverse Run, respectively.
3.
3-Wire Initialization – 3330: The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5 configured as Run, Stop, and Forward/Reverse respectively.
After an initialization is performed, parameter A1-03 will automatically be set back to 0.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
S1
FWD Run/Stop
S2
REV Run/Stop
SN
Run command
(run on momentary close)
Stop command
(stop on momentary open)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
3-wire control
S3 or S5
S
Fig 5.1 2 & 3-Wire Control Wiring Examples
IMPORTANT
Some parameters are unaffected by either the 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization. The following parameters will not be reset when parameter A1-03=2220 or 3330:
A1-00
E1-03 o2-04
Language Selection
V/f Pattern Selection kVA Selection
Programming 5 - 3
b1 Sequence
The Sequence Group contains parameters associated with starting and stopping the Drive. Parameters involving the Run
Command, Speed Reference location, Stopping Method and Hand/Auto changeover are located in this group.
b1-01 Reference (Speed Command) Source Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Operator - Digital Preset Speed d1-01
Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2, see Parameter H3-13)
Serial Com - RS-485 Terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
Option PCB - Option Board connected at 2CN
In order to run the Drive and motor, the Drive must receive a Run command and a speed command. Parameter b1-01 specifies from where the speed command is received when in the “Auto mode. Switching into the “Auto” mode can be done by pressing the AUTO button on the digital operator while the Drive is stopped.
IMPORTANT
If a Run command is input to the Drive but no corresponding speed command is input, the Run indicator on the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink.
If you want the Drive to follow the speed command set by the digital operator: Use the “Hand” mode by pressing the hand key or set b1-01= “0: Operator”. The speed command can then be entered into the U1-01 monitor parameter in the “-DRIVE-”
Menu.
If you want the Drive to follow an “Auto” analog speed command: Set b1-01= “1: Terminals”, and connect a 0 – 10 Vdc speed command signal between terminals A1 and AC or a 4 – 20 mA speed command signal to terminals A2 and AC.
If you want the Drive to receive the speed command from serial communication: Set b1-01= “2: Serial Com”, and connect the RS-485/422 serial communications cable to terminals R+, R-, S+, and S- on the control I/O terminal block. Be sure to use this setting when using the L
ON
W
ORKS
® option card.
If you want to use a network communication card other than L
ON
W
ORKS
®
to input a speed command: Set b1-01= “3: Option
PCB”, and plug the network option board into the 2CN port on the Drive Control PCB. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive into the network.
IMPORTANT
If b1-01= “3: Option PCB” but a network card is not installed in 2CN, an OPE05 Operator Programming
Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run.
b1-02 Run Source
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Operator
Terminals (factory default)
Serial Com
Option PCB
Programming 5 - 4
To successfully operate the Drive remotely, an external run command must be received by the Drive. Parameter b1-02 specifies from where the run command will be accepted.
Although the Run Source and the Reference Source (b1-01) are normally taken from the same source (e.g. digital operator, terminals or serial communication), this is not always the case.
To issue a run command from the digital operator: Set b1-02= “0: Operator”, and use the HAND and OFF buttons to start and stop the Drive.
To issue the run command from the terminals: Set b1-02= “1: Terminals”, and select between 2-wire and 3-wire control operation by doing the following:
2-Wire Control The factory default setting is for 2-wire operation. In the 2-wire configuration a closure between S1 and SN will be interpreted as a Forward Run command by the Drive. A closure between S2 and SN will be interpreted as a Reverse
Run command. If both S1 and S2 are closed, the Drive will stop (decelerate to zero speed) and the digital operator will display an EF (external fault) alarm (Flashing).
S1
S2
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
SN
Fig 5.2 Wire Control
3-Wire Control When any of the multi-function digital input parameters, H1-01 through H1-05, is set to 0, terminals S1 and
S2 become Run and Stop, respectively. The multi-function digital input that was set to 0 will function as a Forward/Reverse input for the Drive. When the Forward/Reverse input is open the Drive will run in the Forward direction and when the input is closed, the Drive will run in the Reverse direction.
In 3-wire operation a momentary closure (> 50mS) of S1 will cause the Drive to run provided that S2 is held closed. The Drive will stop anytime the S2-SN connection is broken. If the 3-wire configuration is implemented via a 3-wire Initialization
(A1-03= “3330: 3-Wire Initial”), then terminal S3 becomes the Forward/Reverse input.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
S3 or S5
S
Run command
(run on momentary close)
Stop command
(stop on momentary open)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Fig 5.3 Wire Control
To issue a run command via serial communication: Set b1-02= “2: Serial Com” and connect the RS-485/422 serial communication cable to R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block. Be sure to use this setting when using the L
ON
W
ORKS
® option card.
To issue the Run command via a network communication card other than L
ON
W
ORKS
® option card: Set b1-02= “3:
Option PCB”, and plug a option board into the 2CN port on the Control PCB. Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive into your L
ON
W
ORKS
®
System.
Programming 5 - 5
IMPORTANT
If b1-01= “3: Option PCB” but a network card is not installed in 2CN, an “OPE05” operator programming error will be displayed on the digital operator and the Drive will not run.
b1-03 Stopping Method
There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the Run command is removed.
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Ramp to Stop (factory default)
Coast to Stop
DC Injection to Stop
Coast w/Timer
“0: Ramp to stop”: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will decelerate the motor to 0 rpm. The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time. The factory default Decel Time is in parameter C1-02.
When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency in b2-01 (Default = 0.5HZ) DC current will be injected in the motor at a level determined by b2-02 (50% Default). The DC Injection condition will occur for the time specified by b2-04 (0.0 Default), to establish the end point of the ramp. DC injection can be used to insure the motor is at zero rpm prior to the Drive shutting off.
Run Command
ON
(CLOSED)
OFF
(OPEN)
100 % b2-01
Output Frequency
Deceleration Time (C1-02)
0 %
DC Injection Brake
| b2-04 |
TIME
Fig 5.4 Deceleration to Stop
The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula
Time to Stop
=
Output Freq.
at time of stop command
Maximum Frequency (E1 04)
×
Setting of active Decel Time (C1 -
02 or C1-04)
If S-Curve characteristics are specified by the Drive programming, they will add to the total time to stop.
“1: Coast to stop”: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast
(uncontrolled deceleration). The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the rotation will stop.
Programming 5 - 6
Run Command
ON
(CLOSED)
OFF
(OPEN)
100 %
Output Frequency
Motor Speed
Drive Output Frequency Interrupted
0 %
TIME
Fig 5.5 Coast to Stop
IMPORTANT
After a stop is initiated, a subsequent Run commands input before the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has expired, will be ignored.
2: DCInj to Stop: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will Baseblock (turn off its output) for the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03). Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired, the Drive will inject DC current into the motor windings to lock the motor shaft. The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop. The level of DC
Injection current is set by parameter b2-02 (50% Default). The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency at the time the Run command is removed.
DC Injection Brake Time
=
(b2 04)
×
10
×
Output Frequency
Maximum Frequency (E1 04)
Run Command
ON
(CLOSED)
OFF
(OPEN) b2-04 x 10
100 %
Output Frequency
0 %
Drive Output Voltage Interrupted
Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
DC Injection Brake
DC Injection Brake Time b2-04
Fig 5.6 DC Injection Braking to Stop b2-04
10%
100% (Maximum
Output Frequency)
IMPORTANT
If an overcurrent (OC) fault occurs during DCInj to Stop, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) until the fault no longer occurs.
3: Coast w/Timer: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to a stop.
If a Run command is input before time T (operation wait time) expires, the Drive will not run and the Run command will need to be cycled before operation can occur. The time T (operation wait time) is determined by the output frequency when the Run command is removed and the active deceleration time (C1-02).
Programming 5 - 7
Run Command
100 %
Output Frequency
0 %
Drive Output
Voltage
Interrupted
Ignored
Run Command
ON
(CLOSED)
OFF
(OPEN)
Deceleration
Time (C1-02)
(C1-02)
Fig 5.7 Coast to Stop with Timer
Minimum
Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Minimum
Output
Frequency
100% (Maximum
Output
Frequency)
Output Frequency at Stop Command Input
b1-04 Reverse Operation
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Reverse Enabled
Reverse Disabled (factory default)
Exchange Phase
ExchgPhs, Rev Dsbl
For some applications reverse motor rotation is not applicable and may even cause problems (e.g., air handling units, pumps, etc.). Setting parameter b1-04 to 1 or 3 will cause the Drive to ignore any inputs for reverse operation. Setting parameter b1-04 to either 2 or 3 will change the motor shaft rotation when a Forward Run command is given by exchanging the order of the output phasing.
The factory default setting of parameter b1-04 is “1: Disabled”. When b1-04= “1: Disabled”, reverse operation is prohibited and no exchanging of output phasing occurs.
Drive terminal S2 is a dedicated input for reverse Run/Stop.
b1-07 Local/Remote Run Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Cycle Extern Run (factory default)
Accept Extrn Run
When the Drive is switched between the Local (Hand) mode (the digital operator) to the Remote (Auto) mode (determined by b1-01 and b1-02), there is the possibility that a Run command is already present (i.e. a contact closure between S1 and SN when b1-02= “1: Terminals”). Parameter b1-07 determines whether the Drive will:
Ignore the external Run command until it is removed and re-instated (b1-07= “0: Cycle Extern Run”)
OR
Accept the already present Run command and immediately begin acceleration to the commanded speed
(b1-07= “1: Accept Extrn Run”).
Programming 5 - 8
IMPORTANT
When switching from local mode to Auto mode when b1-07=“1: Accept Extrn Run” the Drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections prior to switching between local mode and Auto mode.
b1-08 Run Command Selection During Programming
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
As a safety precaution, the Drive will not normally respond to a Run input when the digital operator is being used to adjust parameters. If it is necessary that external Run commands be recognized even while the Drive is being programmed, set b1-08= “1: Enabled”.
Programming 5 - 9
b1-11 Drive Delay Time Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
If a time is set into parameter b1-11, the Drive will delay executing any run command until the b1-11 time has expired.
During Drive delay time execution, the digital operator will display:
DDLY
Waiting to RUN
Both the ALARM and Run indicators will blink while the Drive waits to execute the Run command.
b1-12 Hand Frequency Reference Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Operator (factory default)
Terminals
When the Drive is put into the HAND mode, by pressing the HAND key while in Operation, the Speed Command will be set via the digital operator by default. If it is desirable to have the Speed Command input from the terminals instead of the digital operator, set b1-12= “1: Terminals”.
IMPORTANT
When the Speed Command is set via the terminals, parameter H3-13 will determine whether analog input terminal A1 or A2 is the Speed Command.
b2 DC Braking
The DC Braking Group contains parameters associated with the DC injection braking feature. Parameters involving the starting frequency, current level, braking time, and motor pre heat current level are located here.
b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.5 Hz
Parameter b2-01 sets the output frequency where the Drive begins DC Injection during Ramp to stop. in order to lock the rotor of the motor and established the end point of the ramp. If b2-01 < E1-09 (Minimum Frequency), then DC Injection begins at
E1-09.
Parameter b2-01 also determines the output frequency that the Drive must be at or below before a Zero Speed condition is considered true. This affects any digital output configured as a Zero Speed signal (H2-0x= “1: Zero Speed”).
Programming 5 - 10
Output Frequency
| b2-04
| b2-01 t ime
DC injection
Fig 5.8 DC Injection Braking During Stopping
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Current
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 50%
The level of DC Injection Braking Current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft.
Increasing the level of current will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings and should only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft. DC Injection current is set in percentage of Drive rated output current. Drive rated output current is stated on the Drive nameplate.
b2-03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop
Setting Range: 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.00 Seconds
The Drive can be programmed to automatically DC Inject for a predetermined amount of time prior to accelerating to speed
(b2-03) and/or at the end of a Ramp to stop (b2-04). Parameter b2-03 can be used to stop a rotating motor prior to attempting acceleration (i.e. a wind milling fan). If DC Injection braking at start or Speed Search is not enabled, attempting to drive a spinning motor may cause nuisance tripping.
Parameter b2-04 can be used to resist any residual motion of the load after the deceleration has finished.
DC injection
Output Frequency b2-03 b2-04
Fig 5.9 DC Injection Braking During Starting and Stopping
Parameter b2-04 also serves the function of affecting the length of time DC Injection to stop (b1-03= “2: DC Injection to
Stop”) will occur.
Programming 5 - 11
b2-09 Motor Pre-Heat Current
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
A DC current can be circulated within the motor windings while the motor is stopped. The current will produce heat within the motor and prevent condensation. Parameter b2-09 determines the percentage of Drive rated output current that will be used for the motor pre-heat function. This function can be useful in applications where the motor sits for extended periods of time in humid conditions. Motor pre-heating can only be initiated by closing a digital input programmed as a Motor Pre-heat
Input (H1-0x= 60). Check with the motor manufacturer to determine the maximum acceptable current level the motor can withstand when stopped. Be sure not to exceed the motor manufacturers recommended level.
b3 Speed Search
The Speed Search function allows the Drive to determine the speed of a motor shaft that is being driven by rotational inertia.
Speed Search will allow the Drive to determine the speed of the already rotating motor and begin to ramp the motor to a set speed without first having to bring it to a complete stop. When a momentary loss of supply power is experienced, the Drive output is turned off. This results in a coasting motor. When power returns, the Drive can determine the speed of the coasting motor and start without requiring it to be brought to minimum speed. Speed Search can be programmed to always be active by setting b3-01 or it can be commanded by remote contact closure by setting a digital input.
There are two forms of Speed Search in the Drive, the speed estimation method and the current detection method.
IMPORTANT
When setting the Drive for remote Speed Search input, via a contact closure, the method of Speed Search is determined by the setting of b3-01. If b3-01= “0: SpdsrchF Disable” then the remote input will initiate speed estimation method, and if b3-01= “2: SpdsrchI Disable”, then the remote input will start the current detection method.
Parameters L2-03 and L2-04 also affect the current detection method of Speed Search operation.
b3-01 Speed Search Selection
This parameter is effective only when the Drive is given a new “RUN” command.
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
SpdsrchF Disable
SpdsrchF Enable
SpdsrchI Disable (factory default)
SpdsrchI Enable
Speed Estimation: Method (b3-01= 0 or 1)
The speed estimation method will calculate the speed using measurements of residual motor fields. The speed estimation version is bi-directional and will determine both the motor speed and direction. To enable speed estimation Speed Search at start, set b3-01= “1: SpdsrchF Enable”.
IMPORTANT
If the speed estimation method of Speed Search is to be used, then Auto-tuning must be performed prior to using Speed Search. If the length of cable between the Drive and motor is ever changed after Auto-tuning then Auto-tuning should be performed again.
IMPORTANT
Performing auto-tuning energizes the motor so that identification of key motor characteristics can be determined. Output filters may affect the accuracy of measured characteristics, and/or result in drive damage.
Therefore, it may be necessary to remove output filters completely prior to executing tuning procedures.
Consult the factory with questions regarding filter compatibility.
Programming 5 - 12
IMPORTANT
The speed estimation mode cannot be used when there are multiple motors operated by one Drive or the motor is two or more frames smaller than the standard size motor per the Drive capacity.
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 5.10 Speed Search (Estimated Speed Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long, operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 5.11 Speed Search (Estimated Speed Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time
Current Detection Method (b3-01=2 or 3):
The current detection method starts searching from a predetermined frequency while monitoring the Drive output current to determine when the rotor speed and the Drive output speed (frequency) match.
The current detection version is not bi-directional. To enable current detection Speed Search at start set b3-01= “3: SpdscrhI enable” and program any digital input equal to Speed Search 1 (H1-0x= 61) or Speed Search 2 (H1-0x= 62). Speed Search 1 will start searching from the max. frequency (E1-04) and ramp down to meet the rotor speed. Speed Search 2 will start searching from the set frequency and ramp down to meet the rotor speed.
Programming 5 - 13
IMPORTANT
If a UV1 fault occurs when current detection Speed Search is attempted, increase the setting of L2-04
IMPORTANT
If an OC fault occurs when Speed Search is attempted after power loss recovery, increase the setting of L2-03.
Run command
OFF ON
Maximum output frequency or set frequency
Output frequency
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference b3-02
Speed search current level
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
*
(L2-03)
Fig 5.12 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) at Startup
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference b3-02 speed search operating current
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
*1
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
*2
Fig 5.13 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss time is less than the minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON OFF Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency reference
Output frequency b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 5.14 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss time exceeds the minimum baseblock time
Programming 5 - 14
Setting of b3-01
0
1
2
3
Automatic Speed Search for all RUN commands and momentary power loss
No
Yes - Speed Estimation
No
Yes - Current Detection
Speed Search Method
Used for Multi-function inputs
Speed Estimation
Current Detection
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Current
Setting Range: 0 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 120% of Drive rated output current
When using the current detection method of Speed Search, parameter b3-02 sets the current level that will determine when the search is complete and the rotor and output speeds match. When the output frequency is higher than the actual rotor speed the slip causes the current to be high. As the output frequency is lowered, the closer it comes to the rotor speed, the lower the current draw will be. When the output current drops below the level as set in b3-02 (100% = Drive Rated Current) the output frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes.
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 10.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 2.0 Seconds
Parameter b3-03 sets the deceleration ramp used by the current detection method of Speed Search when searching for the motor’s rotor speed. Even if Speed Search 2 is selected, for Speed Search at start, the time entered into b3-03 will be the time to decelerate from maximum frequency (E1-04) to minimum frequency (E1-09).
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.2 Seconds
In cases where an output contactor is used between the Drive and the motor, extra waiting time is provided after power returns and before Speed Search is performed. This extra time allows for the contactor to operate. When Speed Search at start is used, b3-05 will serve as the lower limit of the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
b3-14 Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled (factory default)
The b3-14 parameter can be used to turn off the bi-directional capabilities of the Speed Estimation form of Speed Search. By turning off the bi-directional capability, the speed search will only try to match the speed in the last known direction.
Programming 5 - 15
b5 PI Function
The capability to accept an analog signal as feedback for a PI (Proportional + Integral) control function is built into the Drive.
D1-04
D1-02
D1-01
Option Card b1-01
4
3
Serial Com
1
2
0
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
1
Frequency Reference using multi-step command
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
Reg. 0Fh, bit 1
1
1 b5-20 b5-18
Scaling
PI Differential
1
Fdbk. H3-09=16
0
0
0 b5-01=0
PI control is OFF under the following conditions:
- b5-01=0
- During JOG command input
ON
ON
Enable / Disable reverse operation when PI output is negative
+
+
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
0 b5-11
1
Lower limit 0
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
1
0
2
Sleep function selection b5-21
-
+ b5-16
Delay
Timer b5-15
Sleep Level
Sleep Function
RUN on/off
Terminal A1
MEMOBUS Reg. 06H
PI target value
Constant b5-19
Terminal A1
Terminal A2
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
1
0
PI SFS b5-17
Scaling o1-03
PI Set Point
(U1-38)
Scaling b5-20 b5-01=3 b5-01=1
PI Input
(U1-36)
OFF
Lower limit
Fmax x109%
SFS
2
Output frequency
Sleep function selection b5-21
0
+
b5-23 b5-22
PI Snooze Level
Delay
Timer
PI
Snooze
PI Snooze Function
0
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
0
1
H3-09=B
PI Feedback 2
(U1-53)
+
-
1
0 b5-28
0
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
1
PI SFS b5-17
0
+
-
PI Input
Caracteristic
H1-xx=35
Z -1
0
1
I-time b5-03
0
P
1/t
Proportional gain b5-02
1
Integral Hold
H1-xx=31
PI Feedback
(U1-24) b5-20
Scaling
1 0
H3-09=16
+
Sleep function selection b5-21
2 b5-29
P
0
+
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
0 or 1
+
+
I - limit b5-04
Z
-1
PI Snooze Function
-
+ b5-24
PI Wake Up Level
0
1
+ +
Integral Reset
H1-xx=30
PI
Wake Up
PI offset
(b5-07)
PI Limit b5-06
PI delay time b5-08
0
1/t
Z
-1
1
PI Output
Characteristic b5-09
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
+
+
0 b5-07
PI offset
PI Output
Gain b5-10
1 0 b5-30
PI output monitor
(U1-37)
Fig 5.15 PI Block Diagram
The analog feedback to the Drive for the PI control is via the A2 terminal. The Drive must be programmed (H3-09= “B: PI
Feedback”) to use terminal A2 as feedback for the PI functionality of the Drive.
The PI setpoint can be configured to come from one of many different inputs or parameters. The table below describes the options for originating the PI setpoint.
Table 1 PI Setpoint Options
The PI Setpoint will be read from:
If these conditions are true
Status of b5-18
Status of
Modbus
Register
0Fh bit 1
Status of b1-01
= 1
= 0
N/A
ON
N/A
N/A
Parameter b5-19
Modbus Register
06H
D1-01
Terminal A1
Serial Comm.
= 0
= 0
= 0
OFF
OFF
OFF
= 0
= 1
= 2
Option PCB = 0 OFF = 3
Programming 5 - 16
In some situations there are two feedback inputs. Air handling unit return fan speed control in a “volume matching” strategy for building pressure control is an example. The drive can be programmed to maintain a set differential between two analog signals.
If input A2 is configured as a “PI Differential Mode” (H3-09= “16: PI Differential”), then the Drive will maintain a set difference between the measurements read on inputs A1 and A2. This differential setpoint is programmed by parameter (b5-07).
b5-01 PI Mode
Setting
0
1
3
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
Fref+PI
The Drive can be used as a stand-alone PI controller. If PI functionality is selected by parameter b5-01, the Drive will adjust its output to cause the feedback from a transmitter to match the PI setpoint (b5-19). The setting of b5-01 will determine whether PI functionality is disabled (b5-01= “0: Disabled”), enabled (b5-01= “1: Enabled”), or enable with the output of the PI function used to trim a Speed Command (b5-01= “3: Fref+PI”).
b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.00 to 25.00
Factory Default: 2.00
The proportional gain will apply a straight multiplier to the calculated difference (error) between the PI Setpoint and the measured transmitter feedback at terminal A2. A large value will tend to reduce the error but may cause instability (oscillations) if too high. A small value may allow to much offset between the setpoint and feedback (See Fig 5.16 below).
b5-03 Integral Time Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 360.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 5.0 Seconds
The Integral factor of PI functionality is a time-based gain that can be used to eliminate the error (difference between the setpoint and feedback at steady state). The smaller the Integral Time set into b5-03, the more aggressive the Integral factor will be. To turn off the Integral Time, set b5-03= 0.00.
Feedback
Setpoint
Setpoint
Offset
Feedback
No Integral
TIME
With Integral
Fig 5.16 PID Feedback Response Characteristics
Programming 5 - 17
TIME
Zero offset with
Integral Action
b5-04 Integral Limit Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
On some applications, especially those with rapidly varying loads, the output of the PI function may have large oscillations. To suppress these oscillations, a limit can be applied to the integral factor by programming b5-04.
b5-06 PI Output Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
Places a cap on the output of the PI function. Limiting the PI function may help to prevent large overshoots in the Drive’s response to error (the difference between the setpoint and the feedback).
b5-07 PI Offset Adjustment
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses. Parameter b5-07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop.
Parameter b5-07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non-Differential PI loop. Every time the PI output is updated, the offset (b5-07) is summed with the PI output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PI loop.
If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation (H3-09= “16: PI differential”), then this parameter is the target setpoint for the differential to be maintained between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2.
b5-08 PI Primary Delay Time Constant
Setting Range: 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.00 Seconds
Acts as a time based filter that lowers the responsiveness of the PI function, but also makes the function more stable when the setpoint varies rapidly or when the feedback is noisy.
b5-09 PI Output Level Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Normal Output (direct acting) (factory default)
Reverse Output (reverse acting)
Normally, the output of the PI function causes an increase in motor speed whenever the measured feedback is below the setpoint. This is referred to as direct acting response. However, if b5-09= “1: Reverse Output”, the output of the PI function causes the motor to slow down when the feedback is below the setpoint. This is referred to as reverse acting response.
Programming 5 - 18
b5-10 PI Output Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.0
Factory Default: 1.0
Applies a multiplier to the output of the PI function. Using the gain can be helpful when the PI function is used to trim the
Speed Command. Increasing b5-10 causes the PI function to have a greater regulating affect on the speed command.
b5-11 PI Reverse Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
0 Limit (factory default)
Reverse
Parameter b5-11 determines whether reverse operation is allowed while using PI control (b5-01
≠0). The factory default setting will not allow the Drive to run in reverse. This parameter does not need to be changed from factory default for a majority of
HVAC applications. (Refer also to b5-09).
b5-12 PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Alarm
Fault
Loss of feedback can cause problems to a PI application. The Drive can be programmed to turn on a digital output whenever a loss of feedback occurs. Feedback Loss Detection is turned on by b5-12. When b5-12= “1: Alarm”, the Drive acknowledges the loss of feedback without stopping or turning on the fault output (MA-MB). If b5-12= “2: Fault”, the Drive coasts to a stop and turns on the fault output if the feedback is determined to be lost.
b5-13 PI Feedback Loss Detection Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
b5-14 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 1.0 Seconds
The Drive interprets feedback loss whenever the feedback signal drops below the value of b5-13 and stays below that level for at least the time set into b5-14. See Fig 5.17 below for timing details.
Measured
Feedback
T T b5-13
TIME
T = b5-14
ON (CLOSED) t OFF (OPEN)
Fig 5.17 Loss of PI Feedback Feature
Programming 5 - 19
b5-15 Sleep Function Start Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
b5-16 Sleep Delay Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.0 Seconds
The Sleep Function can be programmed to prevent running the Drive when the PI loop output or the speed command is so low that no usable work is being done and/or equipment damage may result. The Sleep Function can be Enabled by entering a value in parameter b5-15. If the Drive’s output drops below the level set by the Sleep Function Start Level (b5-15) and remains there at least as long as the delay time determined by the Sleep Delay Time (b5-16), then the Drive’s internal Run command drops out and the Drive output ceases. Though the Drive’s output has ceased, all other Drive functions continue.
Once the Drive’s theoretical output returns to a level above the Sleep Function Start Level (b5-15) and remains above that level for at least the Sleep Delay Time (b5-16), the internal Run command returns and the Drive output begins again. The b5-
16 Delay Time prevents oscillation about the sleep level.
Note:
The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled (b5-01 = “0: Disabled”).
t
Upper Limit d2-01
Sleep Level b5-15
Fig 5.18 Sleep Function Response
b5-17 PI Accel/Decel Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.0 Seconds
This is a soft start function that is applied to the PI setpoint analog input. Instead of having nearly instantaneous changes in signal levels, there is a programmed ramp applied to level changes. When changing setpoints the error can be limited by gradually ramping the setpoint through the use of parameter b5-17.
b5-18 PI Setpoint Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
Programming 5 - 20
In order to use parameter b5-19 as the PI Setpoint, set parameter b5-18= “1: Enabled”. If b5-18= “0: Disabled” the PI Setpoint will either be:
• Modbus Register 06H (If Register 0FH bit 1 is high)
• The active speed command (i.e. Determined by the setting of b1-01). See Table 1 “Setpoint Options”
b5-19 PI Setpoint Value
Setting Range: (dependant on parameter b5-20)
B5-19 Setting Range Example: b5-20 Setting b5-19 “Setting Range”
0
1
0 - 60.00
0.00 - 100.00
2
4
0 - 3600
0 - 1800
6 0 - 1200
Factory Default: 0.00
Parameter b5-19 is for a PI Setpoint value. When b5-18= “1: Enabled”, the value of b5-19 will take precedent over any other PI setpoint unless the Drive is set up for Differential Feedback, in which case, b5-18 and b5-19 have no affect on the PI function.
Displayed units are determined by b5-31, regardless of b5-20 setting. This does not affect the value programmed into the drive.
Example
: if b5-20 = 1, b5-31 = 0, then b5-19 will be displayed in “WC: Inches of Water Column The value set in b5-19 will be in percent feedback.
b5-20 PI Setpoint Display Scaling
Setting Range:
Factory Default: 1
0 to 39999
<3020>
Setting
0
1
2-39 (enter # of motor poles)
40 through
39999
0.01 Hz
U1-24 and U1-38 Display Increments
0.00%
RPM
Engineering Units
The PI Setpoint Display Scaling value (b5-20) is a scaling factor that is applied to the monitor display for both the PI Setpoint
(U1-38) and the PI Feedback (U1-24) and (b5-19) PI Setpoint. Display text for the units is set by b5-31 PI Unit Selection.
If the monitors seem more natural in terms of percentage, set b5-20= 1. If the monitors are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous RPM, set b5-20= [the number of motor poles].
If another engineered unit, such a fpm or cfm, is desired, set b5-20= xxxxx where
X X X X X
Digit 5 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100% feedback.
Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places.
If Digit 5 = 0 number format is XXXX
If Digit 5 = 1 number format is XXX.X
If Digit 5 = 2 number format is XX.XX
If Digit 5 = 3 number format is X.XXX
Programming 5 - 21
For example:
If b5-20= 10425 then at 100% setpoint/feedback the digital operator would display 42.5 for monitor U1-38 or U1-24.
b5-21 Sleep Source
Setting
0
1
2
Description
SFS Input (Output of PI block)
PI Setpoint (factory default)
Snooze
Parameter b5-21 selects the sleep function characteristic action:
When b5-21= “0: SFS Input” the sleep function start level (b5-15) is compared to the Drive’s output (Speed Command after PI block). This is the setting that should be used for open loop or closed loop control.
It is also possible to have the sleep function start level (b5-15) compared to the Drive input or setpoint. For this special application set b5-21= “1: PI Setpoint”.
When b5-21= “2: Snooze” a variation of the sleep function called “Snooze” is enabled, see parameter b5-22 to b5-27.
IMPORTANT
The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled (b5-01= “0: Disabled”).
b5-22 PI Snooze Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
b5-23 PI Snooze Delay Time
Setting Range: 0 to 3600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
b5-24 PI Snooze Deactivation Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
The Snooze Function is a variation on the Sleep Function. The Snooze function must be selected by setting parameter b5-21= “2: Snooze”. Once the Snooze Function is selected, the Drive monitors the output frequency. If the output frequency drops below the PI Snooze Level (b5-22), and stays below that level for at least the PI Snooze Delay Time (b5-23), the Drive output shuts off. This is different from the Sleep Function because it is the feedback that must drop below the PI Snooze
Deactivation Level (b5-24) before normal Drive output will begin again. See Fig 5.19 on next page.
b5-25 PI Setpoint Boost Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
Programming 5 - 22
Just before the Snooze Function is activated, the PI Setpoint can be temporarily increased to create an overshoot of the intended PI Setpoint. The temporary boost is determined by the PI Setpoint Boost Setting (b5-25). Once the temporary boost level is reached (or the PI Maximum Boost Time (b5-26) is exceeded), the Drive output shuts off (snoozes) and the intended PI
Setpoint returns. From this point on, the Snooze Function operates normally and the Drive output returns when the feedback level drops below b5-24. See Fig 5.19 below.
b5-26 PI Maximum Boost Time
Setting Range: 0 to 3600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
Associated with the Snooze Function. In cases where the temporary PI Setpoint (intended PI setpoint + PI Setpoint Boost) cannot be reached within the PI Maximum Boost Time (b5-26), the Setpoint Boost is interrupted and the Drive output is turned off.
b5-26
PI Output
PI Output
PI Setpoint
PI Setpoint
PI Feedback
PI Feedback
Snooze
Function
OFF b5-23
ON b5-23
OFF b5-22
t
b5-24 t
TIME t value or the maximum boost
Fig 5.19 Snooze Function Operation
b5-27 PI Snooze Feedback Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 60%
This is a second method of initiating the Snooze Function. If the PI feedback level exceeds the PI Snooze Feedback Level
(b5-27), then the Drive output shuts off. Once the PI feedback drops below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level (b5-24) then normal Drive and PI operation return. Snooze activates if both b5-22 and b5-27 conditions are met. There is no time delay for wake-up.
Programming 5 - 23
b5-28 PI Feedback Square Root Function Activation
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
If b5-28= “1: Enabled”, the square root of the PI feedback is compared to the PI Setpoint in order to determine appropriate
Drive output to properly regulate the system. This is helpful in cases where the measured feedback is pressure but the PI loop needs to regulate flow.
b5-29 PI Square Root Gain
Setting Range: 0.00 to 2.00
Factory Default: 1.00
A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback.
b5-30 PI Output Square Root Monitor Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
If the PI Function is regulating the flow of a closed loop system by using a pressure feedback, it may be convenient to view the square root of the PI output using monitor U1-37.
Programming 5 - 24
b8 Energy Savings
The energy savings function improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its highest efficiency. This is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and adjusting the motor terminal voltage so that the motor always operates near its rated slip frequency. A motor is most efficient when operating near rated slip conditions.
b8-01 Energy Savings Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
When the Energy Savings function is enabled (b8-01= “1: Enabled”), the Drive reduces the output voltage to the motor below
the voltage value specified by the programmed V/f pattern whenever the motor load is light. Since torque is reduced during this voltage reduction, the voltage has to return to normal levels when the load returns. The energy savings is realized through improved motor efficiency. The reduced output voltage causes increased rotor slipping even with a light load. A motor is most efficient when operating fully loaded (i.e. operating at rated slip).
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value
Setting Range: 0.0 to 655.0
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Parameter b8-04 is used in maximizing motor efficiency. The factory setting will be Drive capacity dependant but can be adjusted in small amounts while viewing the kW monitor (U1-08) and running the Drive to minimize the output kW. A larger value typically results in less voltage to the motor and less energy consumption. Too large a value will cause the motor to stall.
b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time
Setting Range: 0 to 2000 mS
Factory Default: 20 mS
The Energy Saving function will search out the lowest output voltage in order to achieve minimum output power usage.
Parameter b8-05 determines how often the output power (kW) is measured and the output voltage is adjusted.
b8-06 Search Operation Voltage Limit
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
Once Energy Savings is enabled and the optimal energy saving coefficient value has been set, the programmer can have the
Drive further search out the proper voltage to achieve the lowest output power by making minute changes to the output voltage and measuring the output power every b8-05 ms. Parameter b8-06 sets limits to the range over which the voltage will be adjusted in order to minimize the power output. Settings too large a value may allow the motor to stall if the load is applied abruptly.
If b8-06= 0, then the optimum voltage search operation is disabled (but not Energy Savings itself).
Programming 5 - 25
C1 Accel/Decel
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2
Setting Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 30.0 Seconds
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum speed (E1-04). C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1) sets the time to decelerate from maximum speed to zero. C1-01 and C1-02 are the factory default active accel/decel “pair”.
Another accel/decel pair (C1-03 and C1-04) exists that can be activated by a multi-function digital input (H1-0x= 7), or specified by a switch over frequency as programmed in parameter C1-11.
Note:
If fan applications employing duct high pressure safety limit switches, it may be necessary to further adjust the deceleration time to avoid high pressure limit trips due to damper closure as the system is shut down. (An alternate solution in this situation is to set parameter b1-03 to “Coast to Stop”).
C1-09 Fast Stop Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 10.0 Seconds
A special deceleration parameter is available for use with emergency or fault operations. Parameter C1-09 will set a special deceleration that can be operated by closing a digital input configured as H1-0x= 15 or H1-0x= 17. A digital input configured as H1-0x= 15 will look for a switch closure before initiating the Fast Stop operation. A digital input configured as
H1-0x= 17 will look for the switch opening before initiating the Fast Stop operation.
Unlike a standard deceleration time, once the Fast Stop operation is initiated even momentarily, the Drive cannot be re-operated until the deceleration is complete, the Fast Stop input is cleared, and the Run command is cycled.
Programming 5 - 26
d2 Reference (Speed Command) Limits
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 110.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 110.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
The use of parameters d2-01 and d2-02 places limitations on the speed command that the Drive will accept. The parameters are set in units of percentage of the maximum frequency (E1-04) and provide limits on any remote speed command input. By entering upper or lower frequency limits, the Drive programmer can prevent operation of the Drive above or below levels that may cause resonance, equipment damage or discomfort (see also parameter d3-0X). For example, limits may be needed to prevent low speed operation of: Cooling tower fans with gear boxes, pumps with pressure dependent seals, or AHUs with minimum delivery requirements.
Internal Speed Command d2-01 d2-01
Operating
Range
Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Set Speed Command
Note: See also the “Sleep” function in Fig 19 for alternate “lower limit” implementation.
Fig 5.20 Frequency Reference Upper and Lower Limit Effects on the Speed Command
d2-03 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 110.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
Unlike Frequency Reference Lower Limit (d2-02) which will affect the speed command no matter where it is sourced from
(i.e. analog input, preset speed, jog speed, etc.), the Master Speed Reference Lower Limit (d2-03) sets a low speed threshold that will only affect the analog input that is the active master speed frequency (as determined by parameter H3-13 and H3-09).
This parameter allows a minimum speed to be programmed for the master reference while allowing a lower speed to be set as a jog reference. If the speed commanded by the active master speed frequency is below the setting of d2-03, then the Drive will operate at the speed specified by d2-03.
Programming 5 - 27
d3 Jump Frequencies
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1 d3-02 Jump Frequency 2 d3-03 Jump Frequency 3
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width
Setting Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
Factory Default: 1.0 Hz
In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery, the Drive can be programmed with jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specific frequency ranges. If a speed is commanded that falls within a dead band, or Jump Frequency, the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just below the dead band and only accelerate past it when the commanded speed rises above the upper end of the dead band, for increasing references. Similarly, the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just above the dead band and only decelerate past it when the command speed falls below the lower end of the dead band, for decreasing references.
d3-03 d3-03 d3-02 d3-04 d3-01 d3-04
User Frequency
Reference d3-04
Fig 5.21 Jump Frequency Characteristics
Setting the center point of the dead band with the d3-01 through d3-03 parameters and setting the width of the dead band with parameter d3-04 determines the dead band characteristics. The programmer can set up to three Jump Frequencies. If multiple
Jump Frequencies are programmed the following rule applies: d3-01
< = d3-02< = d3-03
Programming 5 - 28
E1 V/f Pattern
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting
Setting Range: 155.0V to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
310.0V to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 208.0V (208V Models)
240.0V (240V Models)
480.0V (480V Models)
Set the Input Voltage parameter (E1-01) to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive (i.e. Overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). E1-01 also serves as the Maximum/
Base Voltage used by the Preset V/Hz curves (E1-03= 0 to D).
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
C
D
F
FF
7
8
9
A
B
Setting
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
Description
50 Hz
60 Hz Saturation
50 Hz Saturation
72 Hz
50 Hz VT1
50 Hz VT2
60 Hz VT1
60 Hz VT2
50 Hz HST1
50 Hz HST2
60 Hz HST1
60 Hz HST2
90 Hz
120 Hz
Custom V/f (factory default, with parameter values per setting 1)
Custom w/o limit
The Drive operates utilizing a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed.
There are 14 different preset V/f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels (frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set (“Customize”) the V/f pattern using parameters E1-04 through E1-13.
Using parameter E1-03, the programmer can select one of the preset V/f patterns or chose between a custom V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit (E1-03= “F: Custom V/F”) and a custom V/f pattern without a voltage limit (E1-03= “FF: Custom w/o limit”).
Programming 5 - 29
Specifications E1-03
50Hz
60Hz Saturation
50Hz Saturation
0
1
F
2
Table 3 Preset V/f Patterns
V/f Pattern *1 Specifications E1-03
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.3 2.5
0
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
2
1
F
50 60
(Hz)
50Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
High
Starting
Torque 2
60Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
High
Starting
Torque 2
8
9
A
B
V/f Pattern *1
230
(V)
28
22
15
13
0 1.3 2.5
9
8
50
(Hz)
230
(V)
28
22
17
13
0 1.5 3.0
B
A
60
(Hz)
230
(V)
230
(V)
3 C
72Hz 3 90Hz C
50Hz
Variable
Torque 1
4
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
60 72
(Hz)
230
(V)
5
57
40
10
9
0 1.3
25
4
50
(Hz)
120Hz D
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
230
(V)
D
60 90
(Hz)
Variable
Torque 2
5
17
10
0 1.5 3.0
60Hz
Variable
Torque 1
Variable
Torque 2
6
7
230
(V)
7
57
40
10
9
0 1.5
30
6
60
(Hz)
If one of the custom V/f patterns is selected, then parameters E1-04 through E1-13 will determine the V/F pattern.
Table 3 is for 240V class units only; for 480V class unit multiply the voltage value by 2.
60 120
(Hz)
IMPORTANT
When a factory Initialization is performed, the setting of E1-03 is unaffected but the settings of E1-04 through
E1-13 are returned to their factory default settings.
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 120.0 Hz
Factory Default: 60.0 Hz
Programming 5 - 30
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 240.0V (240V Models)
480.0V (480V Models)
E1-06 Base Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 60.0 Hz
E1-07 Mid Output Frequency A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 3.0 Hz
E1-08 Mid Output Voltage A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 18.0V (240V Models)
33.6V (480V Models)
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 1.5 Hz
E1-10 Mid Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 10.8V (240V Models)
16.8V (480V Models)
E1-11 Mid Output Frequency B
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
E1-12 Mid Output Voltage B
E1-13 Base Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 0.0V (240V Models)
0.0V (480V Models)
Programming 5 - 31
To set up a custom V/f pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1-04 through E1-13. Be sure that the following condition is true:
E1-09
≤ E1-07 ≤ E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04
Max Voltage E1-05
Mid Voltage B E1-12
Base Voltage E1-13
Mid Voltage A E1-08
Min Voltage E1-10
Min
Freq
Mid
E1-11
Base
Freq
Mid
Freq B
A
E1-04
Max
Freq
Frequency
Fig 5.22 Custom V/f Pattern Programming Curve
Increasing the voltage in the V/f pattern increases the available motor torque. However, when setting a custom V/f pattern, increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current, to prevent:
• Drive faults as a result of motor over-excitation
• Motor overheating or excessive vibration
E2 Motor Setup
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent (see Appendix B)
Factory Default: Model Dependent
The Motor Rated Current parameter (E2-01) is necessary information for the Drive motor protection function. The motor overload protection parameter L1-01 is enabled by default. In addition, motor rated current is used by the torque compensation function to insure optimum torque production. Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) value stamped on the motor’s nameplate. During Auto-tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the motor rated current in parameter T1-04 on the
Auto-Tuning menu. If the Auto-tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into T1-04 will be also written into
E2-01.
For applications employing a Drive that is oversized for the motor, E2-01 may be set as low as 10% of the Drive output current rating. The AMP value in E2-01, however, must always be greater than the “No Load Current” value in parameter E2-03 or an
OPE02 error will be displayed.
Programming 5 - 32
E2-03 No Load Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent (see Appendix B)
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency. Consult the motor manufacturer for the proper value if the no load current is not stated on the motor nameplate.
F6 Com OPT Setup (applies only to the LonWorks option)
F6-01 Operation Selection After Communication Error
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop (factory default)
Fast-Stop
Alarm Only
If a serial communication option board is attached to the Drive at the 2CN connector, the Drive will automatically monitor the card for any type of communication errors. F6-01 is applicable no matter whether a run command or speed command is coming via the option board, digital operator, or terminal input. The setting of F6-01 determines whether the communication error is seen as a fault or an alarm. If F6-01= “3: Alarm Only”, then the fault output is not energized upon a communication error.
All other settings of F6-01 cause the fault output to energize. The setting of F6-01 does not apply to any of the embedded communication protocols used at the RS-485/422 terminals on the removable terminal board. (See parameters H5-0X).
F6-02 Option PCB External Fault Detection Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Always Detected (factory default)
Detected only during operation
F6-03 Option PCB External Fault Stopping Method
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop (factory default)
Fast-Stop
Alarm Only
If an external fault is received from the L
ON
W
ORKS
® or other communication option card, the settings of F6-02 and F6-03 will determine the Drive operation in reaction to the fault signal. Parameter F6-02 will determine if the external fault is always recognized (F6-02= “0: Always Detected”) or only recognized when the Run command is active (F6-02= “1: Detected only during operation”).
Once the fault is recognized, parameter F6-03 will determine the operation of the Drive. If parameter F6-03 is set to anything other then “3”, the Drive will fault and a stopping sequence is begun. If F6-03= “3: Alarm Only”, then the external fault is treated like an alarm. Operation will continue and an EF0 fault will flash on the digital operator.
Programming 5 - 33
F6-05 Current Scaling via Communication Option PCB
Setting
0
1
Description
A Display (factory default)
100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current)
A communication option card can read the Drive’s DPRAM to access the current monitor. The format of the current reading in the DPRAM will be determined by parameter F6-05.
F6-05= “0: A Display” Current is a decimal number corresponding to actual Amperes
F6-05= “1: 100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current)”
Current reading is a number where
8192 = 100% of Drive rated output current
H3 Analog Inputs
H3-02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
H3-03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
In order to have the Drive properly interpret an analog input, it may be necessary to apply a gain and/or a bias to the signal.
The analog inputs have a resolution of 10 bits (1024 steps). Using the factory default settings for the analog input’s gain and bias, the 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA signal at the analog input will yield a 0-100% speed command span.
Gain = 100%
Bias = 0%
0V
4mA
10V
20mA
Fig 5.23 Output Frequency as Commanded Via Analog Input
If a different span of analog input signal is desirable, it will be necessary to adjust the gain, the bias, or both to allow the analog input level to generate the desired frequency command. Adjustment of the gain setting will change the speed command that is equivalent to the maximum analog input (10Vdc or 20mA). If, for instance, the gain is increased to 200%, then 10Vdc or
20mA will be equivalent to a 200% speed command and 5 VAC or 12mA will be equivalent to a 100% Speed Command.
Since the Drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), 0-5Vdc or 4-12mA will now be equivalent to
0-100% speed command span.
Programming 5 - 34
Gain =200%
100%
Bias = 0%
0V
4mA
5V
12mA
10V
20mA
Fig 5.24 Output Frequency as Commanded via Analog Input with Increased Gain Setting
Adjustment of the bias setting will likewise adjust the speed command that is equivalent to the minimum analog input level
(0Vdc or 4mA). If, for instance, the bias is set to –25%, then 0Vdc or 4mA will be equivalent to a –25% speed command.
Since the minimum speed command is 0% an analog input of 2.5 to10Vdc or 8 to 20mA will now be equivalent to 0-100% speed command span.
Gain = 100%
0V
4mA
Bias = -25%
2.5V
8mA
10V
20mA
Fig 5.25 Output Frequency with Reduced Bias Setting
As a further example, for an inverse-acting speed command, set the bias= 100% and the gain= 0%. The minimum analog input level (0Vdc or 4mA) will produce a 100% speed command and the maximum analog input level (10Vdc or 20mA) will produce a 0% speed command.
0V
4mA
10V
20mA
Analog Input Signal
Analog Input Level
Fig 5.26 Output Frequency with Inverted Gain and Bias Settings
Programming 5 - 35
H3-08 Terminal A2 Signal Level
Setting
0
2
0 - 10VDC
4 - 20mA (Default)
Description
The H3-08 parameter (Terminal A2 Signal Level) allows the programmer to specify the signal that will be applied to the A2 analog input. The A2 analog input can accept either a 0–10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal as a reference. The Drive also has a
DIP switch (S1) on the removable terminal board that must be set for the proper reference signal into the A2 analog input. The
S1-2 dipswitch setting determines the internal resistance of the A2 input while parameter H3-08 determines how the Drive interprets the measured signal.
S1
1
1
2
Terminating resistance
DIP Switch S1-1 located on terminal board.
Fig 5.27 DIP Switch S1
Name
S1-1
S1-2
Table 4 DIP Switch S1
Function
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Input signal for analog input A2
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110
Ω
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k
Ω)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250
Ω) (Default)
Programming 5 - 36
H3-09 Terminal A2 Function Selection
Setting
0
2
B
D
E
16
1F
Description
Frequency Bias
Aux Reference (factory default)
PI Feedback
Frequency Bias 2
Motor Temperature
PI Differential
Not Used
The A2 analog input can be programmed to perform many different functions. The setting of parameter H3-09 determines which of the following functions the A2 analog input will perform.
Function: Frequency Bias
Setting: 0
By setting H3-09= “0: Frequency Bias”, the A2 analog input will serve as a bias signal to the A1 Speed Command. The effect of using A2 for a frequency bias is that the level of the A2 analog input will be summed with the level of the Speed Command analog input (A1). For example, if H3-02= 100%, H3-03= 0%, and the A2 analog input level is 1 Vdc, the Speed Command profile will look like the figure below. If A1= 0 Vdc the Speed Command would be 10% of the programmed maximum frequency because A1 (0 Vdc) + A2 (1 Vdc) = 1 Vdc.
H3-02
A2 Input
10%
Bias
0V 1V
9V 10 V
Input
Terminal A1 Voltage
Fig 5.28 Effect of Frequency Bias Function on Speed Command
It should be noted that the bias applied by the A2 analog input functions differently than the level set by the H3-03. If both biases are used simultaneously they will sum together.
The level of the A1 analog input, as a percentage of the maximum input (either 10 Vdc or 20 mA), can be viewed by the U1-
15 monitor. The level of the A2 analog input, as a percentage of the maximum input, can be viewed by the U1-16 monitor.
The bias applied by setting H3-09= “0: Frequency Bias”, can be used in conjunction with the parameter bias H3-03. In that case the H3-03 bias is applied first which changes the slope of the Speed Command vs. Terminal A1 Voltage graph. Then the level of the A2 analog input is summed with the A1 analog input level, which in effect shifts the Speed Command vs. Terminal
A1 Voltage graph upwards or downwards but does not change the slope of the line.
Programming 5 - 37
H3-02
H3-02
10V
Factory Default
H3-03
H3-03
A1 Voltage
10V
With H3-03 applied
A1 Voltage
10V
A1 Voltage
With both H3-03 and analog input bias
(H3-09=0) applied
Fig 5.29 Frequency Bias Applied to Analog Speed Command
Function: Aux Reference
Setting: 2
In order for the A2 analog input to be used as the master Speed Command, parameter H3-09 must be set for Aux Reference
(H3-09= “2: Aux Reference”). Once A2 is configured as an auxiliary reference, it can be selected as the master Speed
Command by setting H3-13= “1: Main Fref TA2”. If H3-09= 2, terminal A2 analog input will become the speed command when a digital input programmed for Multi-Step Ref 1 (H1-0x= 3) is selected by a contact closure.
Function: PI Feedback
Setting: B
Configuring the A2 analog input as PI Feedback (H3-09= “B: PI Feedback”) is a requirement of setting the Drive up for PI operation. The A2 analog input is the only source for feedback for PI operation though the setpoint can come from a number of different sources (refer to the section covering the PI parameters for more information regarding specifying the setpoint source. PI parameters are listed in section b5).
Parameters H3-10 (Terminal A2 Gain) and H3-11 (Terminal A2 Bias) can be used to configure the A2 analog input to match the signal from the Feedback Transmitter.
The U1-24 monitor (PI Feedback) can be used to check the PI Feedback level with the digital operator.
Function: Frequency Bias 2
Setting: D
By setting H3-09= “D: Frequency Bias 2”, the A2 analog input will serve as a bias signal to the A1 Speed Command. This setting functions the same as a setting of H3-09=0: Frequency Bias.
10V
Factory Default
A1 Voltage
H3-02
H3-02
H3-03
10V
With H3-03 applied
A1 Voltage
H3-03
10V
A1 Voltage
With both H3-03 and analog input bias
Fig 5.30 Frequency Bias 2 Applied to Analog Speed Command
Programming 5 - 38
Function: PI Differential
Setting: 16
Normal PI operation will adjust the Drive output in order to match the measured feedback value to a desired setpoint. When
PI is operated in the differential mode, however, the Drive output is adjusted in order to maintain a desired differential between two feedback signals.
When the A2 analog input is configured as a PI Differential (H3-09= “16: PI Differential”), the A1 analog input becomes the other PI Differential input. The desired differential is set by parameter b5-07 (PI Differential Setpoint) and can be set so that
A2 is held less than A1 (b5-07 <0) or A2 is held greater than A1 (b5-07>0).
When PI Differential operation is chosen, the A1 feedback level can be monitored by U1-24 (PI Feedback) and the A2 feedback level can be monitored by U1-53 (PI Feedback2).
Function: Not Used
Setting: 1F
When H3-09= “1F: Not Used”, any signal applied to the A2 analog input will be ignored by the Drive.
H3-10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
H3-11 Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
Parameters H3-10 and H3-11 perform the same function for the A2 analog input that parameters H3-02 and H3-03 perform for the A1 analog input. Please refer to the parameter description for H3-02 and H3-03 for information about H3-10 and H3-11.
These parameters could be used for final calibration of a factory or field installed pressure to electric transducer input connected to terminal A2 and AC. This field calibration may be needed if there is a job site variation from the typical 3 to 15
PSIG pneumatic signal input range.
H3-12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant
Setting Range: 0.0 to 2.00 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.30 Seconds
An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic Drive control when a “noisy” analog reference is used. Parameter H3-12 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to both the A1 and A2 analog inputs. The Drive operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed, but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals.
Programming 5 - 39
Analog
Input
Filter
Noisy input signal
Fig 5.31 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Effect on “Noisy” Signal
H3-13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Main Fref= A1(factory default)
Main Fref= A2
Parameter H3-13 allows the programmer to select which analog input will serve as the Speed Command input when
“Terminals” are selected as the Auto Mode Speed source (b1-01= “1: Terminals”), or Terminal is selected as the reference source for the Hand mode (b1-12= “1: Terminals”). For the A2 analog input to be an effective selection for the
H3-13 parameter, parameter H3-09 must be configured as Aux Reference (H3-09= “2: Aux Reference”).
If H3-09
≠2, then the A1 analog input will be used regardless of the setting of parameter b1-12.
L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Function
When momentary power loss recovery is enabled (L2-01
≠0), a speed search is executed to catch the potentially spinning motor shaft. This speed search will occur regardless of the setting of b3-01 “Speed Search Selection”.
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Disabled
PwrL Ride Thru t
CPU Power Active (factory default)
L2-02 Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: Model Dependent
The Drive allows different responses to momentary power losses. The setting of L2-01 determines whether the Drive attempts to restart after a short loss of incoming AC power and for what length of time this capability remains active.
If L2-01= “0: Disabled”, the Drive detects a UV1 fault 15ms after power loss and automatic restarting is disabled. The Drive cannot restart until the external run command is removed and the UV1 fault is reset.
Programming 5 - 40
If L2-01= “1: PwrL Ride Thru t”, the Drive restarts without the UV1 fault if power is returned within the time specified in
L2-02, the Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time. During the power loss but before the fault trip, the digital operator will display a UV alarm. If L2-02 is set for a time longer than the control power supply can be sustained, a UV1 fault will not occur and the Drive restarts upon the return of AC power. The time that the control power supply can be maintained varies with
Drive size. The larger the Drive, the greater the potential ride-thru time.
If L2-01= “2: CPU Power Active”, the Drive ignores L2-02 and attempts a restart as long as the control power supply is still able to maintain a minimal voltage level. In effect, setting L2-01= “2: CPU Power Active” (factory default) is programming the Drive for maximum Power Loss Ride-thru. An equivalent setting is L2-01= “1: PwrL Ride Thru t”, with L2-02 set to a time longer than the control power supply can be maintained after power is lost.
Note:
The run command must be held during power loss for any power loss ride-thru capability to be possible. It is for this reason that 3-wire control is not recommended for use with the Momentary Power Loss function.
L3 Stall Prevention
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Disabled
General Purpose (factory default)
Intelligent
L3-02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel
Setting Range: 0 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 120% of Drive rated output current
The stall prevention during acceleration function adjusts the acceleration time in order to prevent OC fault trips during acceleration. If L3-01= “0: Disabled”, stall prevention is disabled. If the load is large enough and the acceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop.
If L3-01= “1: General Purpose”, then the standard stall prevention function is enabled. When the output current exceeds the level set by the L3-02 parameter, the Drive will discontinue accelerating and maintain speed. If, during acceleration, the output current comes within 15% of the level set by parameter L3-02, the acceleration time is lengthened. Once the output current level has dropped below the L3-02 level, acceleration will begin again with the acceleration rate reaching the programmed rate once again 15% below the L3-02 level.
Programming 5 - 41
-15%
Stall level during acceleration
Output Current
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 5.32 Detailed Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
If L3-01= “2: Intelligent”, the intelligent stall prevention is enabled. The active acceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to accelerate as quickly as possible without exceeding the L3-02 output current level.
IMPORTANT
Stall Prevention during Acceleration is not effective when the output frequency is less than 6Hz.
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-01= “1: General Purpose”.
Output
Frequency a - Set accel time b - Accel time is extended
t
L3-02
Output
Current
Fig 5.33 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
The L3-02 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current. If the motor capacity is small compared to the
Drive’s capacity, or if the motor stalls during acceleration, lower the set value of L3-02.
Programming 5 - 42
L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
Disabled
General Purpose (factory default)
Intelligent
Stall prev w/R
The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration. If L3-04= “0: Disabled”, stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop.
If L3-04= “1: General Purpose”, then the standard stall prevention function is enabled. If, during deceleration, the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level (see table below), the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed. Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level, the deceleration will continue down to the Speed Command level. See figure below.
480Vac
Drive Voltage
240Vac
Table 5 Stall Prevention During Decel
E1-01
≥ 400Vac
E1-01
< 400Vac
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
(V)
380
760
660
If L3-01= “2: Intelligent”, the intelligent stall prevention is enabled. The active deceleration time is ignored and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level.
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-04= “1 General Purpose” a - Set decel time b - Decel time is extended
Output
Frequency
DC Bus
Voltage
t
a b
380/660/760 Vdc
t
TIME
Fig 5.34 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Deceleration
L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running
Setting
0
1
2
Description
Disabled
Decel Time 1 (factory default)
Decel Time 2
Programming 5 - 43
L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Running
Setting Range: 30 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 20% of Drive rated output current
The Stall Prevention During Running function will attempt to avoid a Drive OC fault occurrence while the Drive is operating at a constant speed. If L3-05= “0: Disabled”, the Drive may fault if the load increases sufficiently to cause the output current to reach the OC fault level (180% of Drive rated output current).
If L3-05= “1: General Purpose”, the Drive is outputting a constant speed, and the Drive’s output current level exceeds the level set by parameter L3-06 for more than 100 ms the Drive will begin to decelerate at the rate specified by parameter C1-02. The
Drive will continue to decelerate until the output current level drops below the L3-06 level (less a 2% hysteresis). Once the output current drops below the L3-06 – 2% level the Drive will begin to accelerate at the currently active acceleration rate
(either C1-01 or C1-03).
If L3-05= “2: Decel Time 2”, the Drive will function as described above except C1-04 will be used instead of C1-02 as the deceleration rate used when the output current exceeds L3-06 for more than 100 ms.
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-05
≠0.
Output
Frequency t a
- Decel time
C1-02 or C1-04.
C1-02 or C1-04 b
– Active accel time b - Active Accel time a a b b
Output
Current
TIME
L3-06 t
Fig 5.35 Time Chart for Stall Prevention Level During Running
The L3-06 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current. If the Drive still faults when L3-05
≠0, then either lower the L3-06 or adjust the C1-02 or C1-04 settings for a quicker deceleration.
Programming 5 - 44
L4 Speed Command Loss Detection
L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection Width
Setting Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
Factory Default: 2.0 Hz
Parameters L4-01 and L4-02 are user specified levels for use with the Fref/Fout Agree 1, Fref/Set Agree 1, and Freq Detect and 2 digital output functions. Please refer to the H2 Digital Output Parameters in the Programming Manual for more information.
L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled @ % of PrevRef (factory default)
L4-06 Frequency Reference at Loss of Frequency Reference
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0% of previous speed command
Factory Default: 80.0% of previous speed command
The Drive can be configured to compensate for the loss of its external speed command. An external speed command is considered lost if it drops 90% of its value in 400mS or less.
Frequency
Reference
T
100%
10% t
T = 400mS
Output
Frequency
TIME
L4-06 t
Fig 5.36 Loss of Frequency Reference Timing Diagram
To enable Frequency loss detection, set L4-05= “1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef”. If Frequency Reference Loss Detection is enabled and the reference is lost, the Drive continues to operate at the speed commanded by parameter L4-06. When the speed command returns, the Drive again follows the speed command.
Setting H2-01/H2-02= “C: Loss of Ref”, configures a digital output as a Frequency Reference Loss indication only when
L4-05= “1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef”.
Programming 5 - 45
L5 Fault Restart
L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Setting Range: 0 to 10
Factory Default: 0
L5-02 Auto Restart Operation Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
No Flt Relay (factory default)
Flt Relay Active
L5-03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault
Setting Range: 0.5 to 600.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 180.0 Seconds
All major faults will cause the Drive to stop. For some faults it is possible to configure the Drive to attempt a restart automatically. After the fault occurs, the Drive baseblocks for L2-03 or L5-03, whichever is greater. After the baseblock is removed the Drive attempts to clear the fault. The internal fault count is incremented by 1. If the Drive was successful in resetting the fault, the Drive begins outputting voltage to the motor. If the Drive was not successful in resetting the fault, the Drive again waits for the time set in L2-03 or L5-03 (whichever is greater) and the process is repeated. The process repeats until the maximum number of restart attempts, as programmed in the parameter L5-01 is reached.
Fig 5.37 Automatic Restart Timing Diagram
Programming 5 - 46
The auto restart count is reset back to 0 if any of the following occur:
• No further faults for ten minutes after the last retry.
• The Drives power is turned off (the Drive must be without power long enough to let control power dissipate).
• The SHIFT/RESET key is pushed after the last reset attempt.
The setting of parameter L5-02 determines whether the fault output (MA-MB) will be closed during an auto restart attempt.
The setting of L5-02 can be important when interfacing the Drive with other equipment.
The following faults will allow the Auto Restart function to initiate:
• OC (Overcurrent)
• LF (Output Open Phase)
• PF (Input Phase Loss)
• PUF (DC Bus Fuse)
• OL1 (Motor Overload)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• OL2 (Drive Overload)
• OV (DC Bus Overvoltage)
• GF (Ground Fault)
• UV1 (DC Bus Undervoltage)
• OH1 (Overheat)
In order for auto restart after a UV1 fault, Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru must be enabled (L2-01= “1: PwrL Ride Thru t”, or “2: CPU Power Active”). Setting H2-01 or H2-02 equal to “1E” configures a digital output as “Restart Enabled” to signal if an impending auto restart is possible.
Programming 5 - 47
L6 Torque Detection
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1
Setting
0
1
4
5
2
3
6
7
8
Description
Disabled (factory default)
OL@SpdAgree - Alm
OL At Run -Alm
OL@SpdAgree - Flt
OL At Run - Flt
UL@SpdAgree - Alm
UL at Run - Alm
UL@SpdAgree - Flt
UL At Run - Flt
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1
Setting Range: 0 to 300% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 15% of Drive rated output current
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 10.0 Seconds
The Drive can be programmed to indicate when either an overtorque or an undertorque conditions exist. A digital output must be programmed for “Torque Detection”, (H2-01/H2-02= “B: Trq Det 1 N.O.” or “17: Trq Det 1 N.C.). A warning of an overtorque condition can indicate a jam and an undertorque condition can indicate a broken belt, no water in a pump, or other loss of load.
To configure Torque Detection requires the following decisions:
1.
Do you wish to check for an overtorque condition or an undertorque condition?
2.
Do you wish to check for the torque condition whenever the drive is running or only at speed agree? Nuisance detection during acceleration, when variable torques are normally required, can be avoided.
3.
Do you want the drive to fault if the torque condition is detected or only alarm and continue operation?
The following table can help choose the proper setting for Torque Detection Selection 1 to get the wanted results.
Table 6 L6-01 Setting Choices
L6-01
Setting
0
1
4
5*
2
3
6
7
8
Overtorque Undertorque
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*Suggested settings for Loss of Load indication
Fault Alarm
Torque Detection Disabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
Always
Detected
X
X
X
X
Only Detected @
Spd Agree
X
X
X
X
Programming 5 - 48
After selecting the proper detection scheme the Torque Detection Level (L6-02) must be specified. If the current level read by the output current transformers rises above (overtorque) or drops below (undertorque) this level, and remains there for at least the Torque Detection Time (L6-03), then the Torque Detection Function will change the state of any digital output configured for Torque Detection (H2-01/H2-02= “B: Trq Det 1 N.O.”, or “17: Trq Det 1 N.C.”).
*
*
Torque detection level -10%
L6-03 t
L6-03
CLOSED
TIME
Closed
Open
* When the output current drops below the Torque Detection Level by
approximately 10% of the Drive’s rated output current the digital output is reset.
Fig 5.38 Over Torque Detection
*
Torque detection level 10% *
L6-02 t
L6-03
L6-03
Closed
TIME
* When the output current rises above the Torque Detection Level by
approximately 10% of the Drive’s rated output current the digital output is reset.
Fig 5.39 Under Torque Detection
Programming 5 - 49
L8 Hardware Protection
L8-02 Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
Setting Range: 50 to 130 o
C
Factory Default: 95 o
C
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
Description
Ramp to Stop (Decel Time C1-02)
Coast to Stop
Fast-Stop (Decel Time C1-09)
Alarm Only
OH Alarm and Reduce (factory default)
The Drive is capable of warning the operator of an impending heatsink over-temperature fault via an OH pre-alarm. The level at which the pre-alarm will activate is determined by the setting of parameter L8-02. Measurement of the heatsink temperature is done with several strategically mounted thermistors. If any of the heatsink thermistors measure a temperature in excess of the setting of L8-02, the Drive will fault (OH2) and either: ramp to stop using the C1-02 deceleration rate (L8-03= “0: Ramp to Stop”), coast to stop (L8-03= “1: Coast to Stop”), ramp to stop using the C1-09 fast stop deceleration rate (L8-03=
“2: Fast-Stop”), alarm (OH) and continue running (L8-03 = “3: Alarm Only”), alarm (OH) and continue running but at a reduced speed (L8-03= “4: Alarm & Reduce”). If L8-03= 4: Alarm and Reduce, the Drive will continue to run but will reduce the speed to the level determined by parameter L8-19. Refer to the description for parameter L8-19.
If a digital output is configured for OH PreAlarm (H2-01= “20: OH PreAlarm”), it will close whenever the heatsink temperature is greater than the L8-02 level no matter what the setting is of L8-03.
L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.0% of Drives OV Trip point
Factory Default: KVA Dependent
The Drive checks for a lost input phase by monitoring the DC Bus voltage ripple. After an initial delay of approximately 12 seconds, the Drive will sample the DC BUS voltage every 1.28 seconds to determine the minimum and maximum voltage readings. The difference between the minimum and maximum voltage is averaged over ten consecutive scans. If this
“averaged” value is greater than the trip level as determined by L8-06 (L8-06 x 400 for 200 volt class Drives; L8-06 x 800 for
400 volt class Drives) the Drive shuts down and displays “PF”, an input phase loss fault.
Phase Loss t
Closed
Open
Input Phase Loss
DC Bus
Voltage
L8-06
10 seconds
Fig 5.40 Input Phase Loss Detection Diagram
Programming 5 - 50
Time t
L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled (factory default)
The Drive has a ground fault detection circuit that activates when the current to ground exceeds 50% of the Drive’s rated output current. The current to ground is determined by comparing the measured current on each of the output phases. If the current to ground is determined to be above 50% of the Drive’s rated output current the digital operator will display a GF and the
Drive will coast to stop.
L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Fan On-Run Mode (factory default)
Fan Always On
L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time
Setting Range: 0 to 300 Seconds
Factory Default: 300 Seconds
Parameters L8-10 and L8-11 allow the Drive programmer to customize the heatsink cooling fan operation. Parameter L8-10 determines whether the cooling fans are always ON whenever the Drive is powered (L8-10= “1: Fan Always On”) or if the cooling fans are only ON when the Drive is in a Run condition (L8-10= “0: Fan On-Run Mode”).
Parameter L8-11 is a delayed OFF for the cooling fan if L8-10= “0: Fan On-Run Mode”. When the cooling fans are set to turn
OFF when the Run command is removed, parameter L8-11 will cause the fans to continue cooling the Drive for the amount of time programmed into L8-11 after the Run command is actually removed. The Drive can be programmed to allow the cooling fan to run for up to 5 minutes (factory default) after the run command is removed.
Both parameters are intended to extend fan life while still providing sufficient cooling for proper Drive operation.
L8-19 Overheat Frequency Reference Reduction Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0% of maximum frequency
Factory Default: 20.0% of maximum frequency
When the heatsink temperature reaches the OH Pre-alarm level (L8-02) and the Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection parameter is set for Alarm and Reduce (L8-03= “4: OH Alarm & Reduce”), the L8-19 parameter sets the amount of speed decrease that will be applied to the Speed Command in order to lower the heatsink temperature. The decrease in speed will lower the current being switched and conducted by the heat producing output transistors of the Drive.
Parameter L8-19 is set in percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
Programming 5 - 51
o1 Monitor Configuration
o1-01 User Monitor Selection
Setting Range: 6 to 53
Factory Default: 6
20
24
28
34
36
37
38
39
40
51
52
53
Setting
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Description
Output Voltage (factory default)
DC Bus Voltage
Output Power
Input Terminal Status
Output Terminal Status
Drive Operation Status
Cumulative Operation Time
Software Number
Terminal A1 Input Voltage
Terminal A2 Input Voltage
Motor Secondary Current (I q
)
Output Frequency After Soft Start
PI Feedback Value
CPU Number
First Parameter Causing an OPE
PI Input
PI Output
PI Setpoint
Memobus Communication Error Code
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time
Auto Mode Frequency Reference Value
Hand Mode Frequency Reference Value
PI Feedback 2 Value
Programming 5 - 52
o1-02 Power-On Monitor
Setting
1
2
3
4
Description
Frequency Reference (factory default)
Output Frequency
Output Current
User Monitor (set by o1-01)
When the Drive is powered up, three monitors are displayed on the digital operator. The first and largest monitor is the
“Power-On” monitor. The factory default “Power-On monitor” is Speed Command (U1-01). Below the Speed Command monitor are the next two sequential monitors, Output Frequency (U1-02) and Output Current (U1-03). Pressing the
INCREASE key once scrolls the monitors to show the User Monitor as selected by o1-01. The factory default for o1-01 is the
Output Voltage monitor (U1-06).
The active monitor displayed when the Drive is powered on can be changed to either be U1-01 (Speed Command), U1-02
(Output Frequency), U1-03 (Output Current), or the User Monitor. Whichever monitor is selected as the Power-On top monitor, the two monitors displayed below it are the next two sequential monitors. See example below.
Active Monitor
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U101 = 60.00Hz
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Active Monitor Title
Output Frequency
Output Current
Next two sequential monitors
For example, if the Drive needs to display the Elapsed Timer as the Power-On monitor, then o1-01 must be set to “13” and o1-02 must be set to “4”. The next time Drive power is cycled, the digital operator displays U1-13 (Elapsed Time), U1-14
(Flash ID), and U1-15 (Term AI Level).
Active Monitor
-DRIVE- Rdy
Elapsed Time
U1-13= 2
H
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-14= 03010
15
Flash ID
Term AI Level
Active Monitor Title
Next two sequential monitors
Programming 5 - 53
o1-03 Digital Operator Display Scaling
Setting
0
1
2 - 39
40 - 39999
Description
Hz (factory default)
%
RPM (Enter the # of Motor Poles)
User Display
Parameter o1-03 allows the programmer to change the units in which the speed monitors and some speed parameters are displayed. The o1-03 parameter will change the units of the following:
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference Monitor)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency Monitor)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 through d1-17 (Preset Frequency References and Jog Reference)
The table below details how the setting of o1-03 will affect the way the listed monitors and parameters will be displayed.
If o1-03 is:
Table 7 Display Scaling
The frequency format is
0
1
0.01 Hz
0.00%
2 through 39
(enter the # of motor poles)
0 RPM
40 through 39999 Engineering Units
The factory default setting (o1-03= “0”) sets the Drive up to display the affected monitors and parameters in terms of hertz
(Hz).
If the speeds seem more natural in terms of percentage of maximum, set o1-03= “1”. If the speeds are easier to work with when displaying the equivalent synchronous motor RPM, set o1-03= [the number of motor poles]. If another engineered unit, such as fpm or gpm, is desired, set o1-03= xxxx where
X X X X X
Digit 5 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100% speed.
Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places in the displayed number.
If Digit 5 = 0 number format is XXXX
If Digit 5 = 1 number format is XXX.X
If Digit 5 = 2 number format is XX.XX
If Digit 5 = 3 number format is X.XXX
Programming 5 - 54
For example:
If o1-03= 10425, then at full speed the digital operator will display “42.5”. Configuring parameter o1-03 for displaying in terms of an engineering unit is only appropriate if the actual display units have a linear relationship with the actual output speed.
o1-05 LCD Contrast Adjustment
Setting Range: 1, 3 or 5
Factory Default: 3
The contrast setting of the LCD display of the digital operator can be adjusted by the setting of parameter o1-05. The higher the number programmed into o1-05, the darker the background will become. Set o1-05 to the value that makes the LCD the easiest to view at the normal viewing distance and angle.
o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode
Setting
0
1
Description
3 Mon Sequential (factory default)
3 Mon Selectable
o1-07 Second Line User Monitor
Setting Range: 1 to 53
Factory Default: 2
o1-08 Third Line User Monitor
Setting Range: 1 to 53
Factory Default: 3
Normally the monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential monitors. If o1-06 (User Monitor
Selection Mode) is set to “1: 3 Mon Selectable”, those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters o1-07 and o1-08 and will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the INCREASE and DECREASE keys.
Active Monitor
-DRIVE- Rdy
PI Feedback
U1-24= 64.55%
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-37= 0.00%
U1-38= 2.50%
PI Output
PI Setpoint
Active Monitor Title
For Example:
The Display above showing PI Feedback, PI Output and PI Setpoint would be useful when setting up a PI Control Loop.
Programming 5 - 55
o2 Key Selections
o2-03 User Parameter Default Value
Setting
0
1
2
No Change
Set Defaults
Clear All
Description
The Drive gives the option of configuring any and all of the programming parameters and then saving the parameters as “User
Initialization Values”. After configuring the Drive, set parameter o2-03= “1: Set Defaults”, to save the parameters to a User
Initialization memory location. Once this has been done, the “Initialize Parameters” parameter (A1-03) will offer the choice of
“1110:User Initialize”. Choosing A1-03= “1110: User Initialized”, will reset all modified parameters back to what they were the last time they were saved using o2-03.
The choice of setting A1-03= “1110: User Initialized”, is unavailable until first setting the User Initialization parameters using o2-03. Once a User Initialization is set (saved), it can be cleared by setting o2-03= “2: Clear All”. After clearing the User
Initialization parameters, the choice of “1110: User Initialize” is no longer a available in A1-03.
o2-05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled (factory default)
The factory default setting of the Frequency Reference Setting Method parameter (o2-05= “1: Enabled”) dictates that when setting a Speed Command via the digital operator (“Hand” mode), it is not necessary to press the DATA/ENTER key before the Drive will begin to accelerate or decelerate to the new set speed. This is referred to as MOP (Motor Operated Potentiometer) type functionality. When o2-05= “1: Enabled”, the speed command is stored to memory 5 seconds after the
INCREASE or DECREASE keys are released.
When o2-05= “0: Disabled”, the digital operator INCREASE and DECREASE keys will change the speed command but the
Drive will not accelerate or decelerate to the new speed command until the DATA/ENTER key is pressed. In order to change the Speed Command in the HAND mode, U1-01 must be the top monitor and then the ENTER key must be pressed in order to access the Speed Command function. This in not to be confused with pressing the ENTER key in order to achieve a change in speed using the INCREASE and DECREASE keys, which is the subject of parameter o2-05.
Programming 5 - 56
o2-06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled
Enabled (factory default)
Leaving o2-06 enabled will cause the Drive to fault, when the digital operator is removed, even if it’s not outputting to the motor. The reset key on the digital operator will need to be pressed after reconnecting the digital operator to reset the fault and continue normal operation.
If o2-06 = “0: Disabled” then the Drive will not fault if the digital operator is disconnected, but the Drive will discontinue motor operation. If full Drive operation is required while the digital operator is removed set o2-06 = “0: Disabled” and o2-15
= “0: Disabled” (Hand Key Function). If both o2-06 and o2-15 are disabled then the digital operator can be disconnected without disturbing Drive operation.
o2-07 Cumulative Operating Time Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 65535 Hours
Factory Default: 0 Hours
o2-08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Power-On Time
Running Time (factory default)
The Drive features an Elapsed Timer monitor that records in units of hours. The Elapsed Timer monitor is U1-13. Parameter o2-08 programs this function to either accumulate elapsed hours based on time the Drive is powered (o2-08= “0: Power-On
Time”) or time the Drive is running (o2-08= “1: Running Time”). The Drive is considered “running” anytime there is an active run command or when the Drive is outputting voltage (i.e. including during deceleration).
-DRIVE- Rdy
Elapsed Time
U1-13= 0H
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-14= 03010
U1-15= 34.1%
Parameter o2-07 allows manual adjustment of the Elapsed Timer, primarily to accommodate maintenance or control board replacement in the event of damage. To reset the Elapsed Timer back to zero, set o2-07= 0.
Programming 5 - 57
o3 Digital Operator Copy Function
o3-01 Copy Function Selection
Setting
0
1
2
3
Description
COPY SELECT (factory default)
INV
→OP READ
OP
→INV WRITE
OP
↔INV VERIFY
Note:
The copy function is disabled when serial communication is active.
o3-02 Read Allowed Selection
Setting
0
1
Description
Disabled (factory default)
Enabled
The digital operator has parameter COPY capabilities via built in non-volatile memory. The digital operator can READ all of the parameters in the Drive and store them for later WRITE back to the Drive or into a Drive with the same product code and software number. In order to read the parameter values and store them in the digital operator, select o3-02= “1: Enabled”. If you attempt to READ the data, which overwrites any previously stored data, without first setting o3-02= “1: Enabled”, you will get the following error:
-ADV-
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
After setting o3-02= “1: Enabled”, it is possible to store parameter values in the digital operator by setting o3-01=1 (INV
→OP
READ).
A successful READ of the parameter values will display:
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE
An error may occur while saving the parameter values to the digital operator’s memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter o3-01. Error displays and their meanings are covered in Chapter 6: Diag-
nostics and Troubleshooting
of the E7 Users Manual (TM.E7.01). To COPY parameter values into a Drive, set o3-01= “2: OP-
>INV WRITE”. During the writing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display:
Programming 5 - 58
-ADV-
COPY
OP→INV COPYING
A successful COPY of the parameter values will display:
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
An error may occur while writing the parameter values to the Drive. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to parameter o3-01. Error displays and their meanings are covered in Chapter 6: Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
of the E7 Users Manual (TM.E7.01).
It is possible to compare the parameter values stored in the digital operator with the parameter values currently in the Drive by using the VERIFY function. This VERIFY function should not be confused with the “-VERIFY-” that is displayed on the digital operator when viewing the “Modified Constants” menu. To VERIFY the parameter values in the Drive as compared with those stored in the digital operator, set o3-01= “3: OP<-->INV VERIFY”. During the comparing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display:
-ADV-
VERIFY
DATA VERIFYING
A successful VERIFY of the parameter values will display:
-ADV-
VERIFY
VERIFY COMPLETE
If all the parameter values stored in the digital operator do not match those programmed in the Drive, the digital operator displays the following:
Programming 5 - 59
-ADV-
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
The digital operator will not display which parameters did not match, only that the verification found discrepancies in some parameter values.
NOTE:
In order to properly use the COPY or VERIFY functions, the following Drive specifications must be identical between the Drive that the parameters were read from and the Drive that the parameters are to be written to:
• Model Number (e.g. CIMR-E7U2015)
• Software Number (e.g. 03011 also known as FLASH ID)
Yaskawa offers DriveWizard™ software that can also READ, COPY, and VERIFY Drive parameter values. DriveWizard™ lists all discrepancies between the Drive and a pre-saved parameter file when verifying is performed.
To use
DriveWizard first select o2-15= “0: Disabled” and select o2-06= “0: Disabled” then remove the digital operator/keypad and attach the DriveWizard cable in its place.
Programming 5 - 60
T1 Auto-Tuning
IMPORTANT
Performing auto-tuning energizes the motor so that identification of key motor characteristics can be determined. Output filters may affect the accuracy of measured characteristics, and/or result in drive damage.
Therefore, it may be necessary to remove output filters completely prior to executing tuning procedures.
Consult the factory with questions regarding filter compatibility.
T1-02 Motor Rated Power
Setting Range: 0.00 to 650.00 kW
Factory Default: Model Dependent
T1-04 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Auto tuning is required for optimum performance. In addition, the Drive requires Line-To-Line Resistance auto-tuning before it can properly perform the Estimated Speed Search method. This method of speed search allows for bi-directional speed search. The T1 parameters are found under the Auto-Tuning menu.
To perform auto-tuning follow these steps:
1.
In T1-02, enter the rated power in kilowatts (kW) of the motor attached to the Drive. If the motor nameplate lists the rated power in terms of horsepower (HP), use the following formula to convert to kW before setting the value of T1-02: kW = HP x 0.746
2.
In T1-04, enter the Full Load Amps (FLA) as stamped on the motor’s nameplate.
3.
Press the INCREASE key once to display this:
-ATUNE-
Rdy
Auto-Tuning
0Hz/ 0.00A
Tuning Ready ?
Press HAND key
4. If ready, press the HAND key once to start auto-tuning. This process will last for approximately 15 seconds. Once auto-tuning is finished, the digital operator will display this:
-ATUNE-
Tune Successful
0Hz/ 0.00A
5.
To exit the Auto-Tuning menu, press the MENU key once.
NOTE: It is possible to a get a “Data Invalid” error if the either T1-02 or T1-04 fall outside the range of what the Drive will accept as reasonable levels for the programmed size of drive (o2-04).
Programming 5 - 61
Notes:
Programming 5 - 62
Chapter 6
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive.
Fault Detection........................................................................... 6-2
Alarm Detection ......................................................................... 6-9
Operator Programming Errors (OPE) ...................................... 6-12
Auto-Tuning Faults................................................................... 6-13
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults ................................... 6-14
Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 6-15
Main Circuit Test Procedure .................................................... 6-21
Drive Date Stamp Information.................................................. 6-25
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 1
Fault Detection
When the Drive detects a fault, the fault information is displayed on the digital operator, the fault contact closes, and the motor coasts to stop. (However, a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected.)
• If a fault occurs, take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause.
• To restart, reset the fault with any of the following procedures:
• Turn ON the fault reset signal.
• Set “14: Fault Reset” to a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-05).
• Press the RESET key of the digital operator.
• Shut off the Drive input power once, and then turn on again.
WARNING
The Run Command (Start Command) needs to be removed prior to resetting a fault. Resetting a fault by removing and reapplying power to the Drive while the Run Command is applied, may cause the Drive to start unexpectedly. Therefore, make sure all personnel are clear from the Drive, motor, and machine prior to resetting the Drive.
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
BUS
Option Com Err
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken, master has stopped communicating
Check all connections, verify all user-side software configurations.
CE
Memobus Com Err
CPF00
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
Modbus Communication Error
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds
Connection is broken, master has stopped communicating
Operator Communication Fault 1
Transmission between the Drive and the digital operator cannot be established within 5 seconds after supplying power
Digital operator cable not securely connected, digital operator defective, control board defective
CPF01
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
CPF03
EEPROM Error
External RAM of CPU is defective
Operator Communication Fault 2
After communication started with the digital operator, a communication fault occurred for 2 seconds or more
Baseblock Circuit Fault
Baseblock circuit fault at power-up
EEPROM Fault
EEPROM fault, check sum not valid
Check all connections, verify all user-side software configurations.
Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it
Control circuit damage
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the Drive
Remove the digital operator once and then reinstall it
Digital operator cable not securely connected, digital operator defective, control board defective
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Gate array hardware failure during power-up
Replace the Drive
Perform a factory initialization
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the control board
Perform a factory initialization
Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the control board
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 2
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPF10
ASIC-Err
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU Down
CPF22
Option Type Err
CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault
CPU External A/D Converter Fault
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
(RAM)
Watchdog Timer Fault
(WAT)
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault
(COY)
Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals
Perform a factory initialization
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the control board
Perform a factory initialization
Noise or spike on the control circuit input terminals
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the control board
- - -
Control circuit damage
- - -
Control circuit damage
- - -
Control circuit damage
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the Drive
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the Drive
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the Drive
ASIC Version Fault
(ASIC)
Control circuit damage Replace the Drive
Option Card Fault
Self-diagnosis Fault of Communication
Option Card
Communication Option Card Code Number
Fault
Option card connector connection fault
Remove all inputs to the option board
Perform a factory initialization
Option card A/D converter fault
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the option board
Replace the Control board
Noise or spike on the communication line, defective option board
Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board
Perform a factory initialization
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the option board
Replace the control board
Remove any option boards
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Perform a factory initialization
Replace the option board
Replace the control board
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 3
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
EF0
Opt External Flt
Communication Option Card
Interconnection Fault
Communication Option Card External Fault
Remove power to the Drive
An option board is not correctly connected to the control board or an option board that is not made for the Drive is attached to the control board
Connect the option board once more
Perform a factory initialization
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace the option board
Replace the control board
An external fault condition exists
Check for an external condition
Verify the parameters
Verify communication signal
EF3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF7
Ext Fault S7
External Fault at Terminal S3
External Fault at Terminal S4
External Fault at Terminal S5
External Fault at Terminal S6
An external fault condition exists connected to a multifunction digital input
Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition
FBL
Feedback Loss
GF
Ground Fault
External Fault at Terminal S7
Remove the fault from a multifunction digital input
PI Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to fault
(b5-12 = 2) and the
PI Feedback < PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection Time (b5-14)
PI Feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working
Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PI Feedback source signal
Check to ensure the PI Feedback source is installed and working properly
Output Ground Fault
Drive output grounding current has exceeded 50% of the Drive rated output current
Motor lead is shorted to ground, DCCT defective
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor
Check the motor for a phase to ground short.
Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the
DCCT reading
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 4
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
There is a broken wire in the output cable.
There is a broken wire in the motor winding.
The output terminals were loose.
Check the wiring to the motor.
Check the motor for phase to ground short.
LF
Output Phase Loss
LL3
Loss of Load Det 1
OC
Over Current
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the Drive output
This fault is detected when output current has exceeded 5% imbalance.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the
Drive’s maximum motor capacity.
Check the motor and Drive capacity.
Low impedance motor was used.
Add additional impedance.
Parameter E2-03 set incorrectly Adjust E2-03 to a lower value.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate
Loss of Load Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03
Motor is underloaded
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault
Overcurrent
Drive output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level (approximately
180% of Drive rated output current)
Shorted Drive output phase to phase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/ decel time too short, contactor on the Drive output is opened and closed, a special motor or a motor with a FLA rating larger than Drive rated output current
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor
Check the motor for a phase-tophase short
Check the Drive for a phase-tophase short at the output
Verify C1-01 and C1-02 are set correctly
Check load conditions
OH1
Heatsnk MAX Temp
Cooling Fin/Cooling Fin Fan Overheat
The temperature of the Drive cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8-02, and L8-03=0-2
Drive Internal Cooling Fan
Cooling fan(s) are not working, high ambient temperature, a heat source is too close to the Drive
Check for dirt build-up on the fans and cooling fins
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive
Remove the heating unit/Replace the cooling fan
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Drive stops or continues operation according to the setting of L1-03.
Overheating of motor as measured by motor thermistor
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02)
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13)
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01)
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 5
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
OH4
Motor Overheat 2
OL1
Motor Overloaded
OL2
Inv Overloaded
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
OPR
Oper Disconnect
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
Motor Overheating Fault
The Drive stops operation according to the setting of L1-04.
Motor Overload
Designed to protect the motor.
Fully adjustable from parameter E2-01
Drive Overload
Designed to protect the Drive
Overtorque Detection 1
Drive output current > L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03
The load is too large. The cycle time is too short at the accel/decel time
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1-01 and C1-02
The voltage of the V/F pattern is high
Review the V/F pattern parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13
The size of the Drive is small Change to a larger size Drive
Motor is overloaded
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The Drive will stop if the digital operator is removed when the Drive is commanded to run through the digital operator
Overheating of motor as measured by motor thermistor
The load is too large. The cycle time is too short at the accel/decel time
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02)
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13)
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01)
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1-01 and C1-02
The voltage of the V/F pattern is high
Review the V/F pattern parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13
Motor rated current setting is improper
Check the motor rated current value in E2-01
The digital operator is not attached or the digital operator connector is broken
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3
Attach the digital operator
Check the digital operator connector
Verify the setting of o2-06
Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications
DC Bus Overvoltage
208-240Vac: Trip point is
≥ 400Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is
≥ 800Vdc
The deceleration time is set too short
Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive
Extend the time in C1-02
Remove the power factor correction capacitors
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 6
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
PF
Input Pha Loss
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
RH
DynBrk Resistor
RR
DynBrk Transistr
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
Open phase on input of the Drive Check the input voltage
Loose terminal screws at
R/L1, S/L2 or T/L3.
Tighten the terminal screws
Momentary power loss occurred Check the input voltage
Input Phase Loss
Drive input power supply has an open phase or has a large imbalance of input voltage
Input voltage fluctuation too large Check the input voltage
Parameter L8-06 value is set incorrectly
Verify parameter L8-06 is set correctly per the kVA tables on pages C-2 and C-3. Adjust L8-06 according to your application.
The higher the value the less sensitive it becomes.
CAUTION:
Changing this
parameter from the factory default setting may cause
Drive failure and void the product warranty. (Consult the factory for application assistance).
Remove power from the Drive
Disconnect the motor
DC Bus Fuse
Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened
Dynamic Braking Resistor
The protection of the dynamic braking resistor based on setting of L8-01
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The dynamic braking transistor is not operating properly.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is
≤ L2-05
208-240Vac: Trip point is
≤ 190Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is
≤ 380Vdc
Shorted output transistor(s) or terminals
Perform the checks without power in Table 6.6
Replace the shorted component(s)
Replace the defective fuse
Verify dynamic braking duty cycle
Overhauling load, extended dynamic braking duty cycle, defective dynamic braking resistor
Shorted dynamic braking transistor, high DC bus voltage, defective dynamic braking resistor
Monitor DC bus voltage
Replace dynamic braking resistor
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Replace defective dynamic braking transistor or resistor
Monitor DC bus voltage
Low input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3
Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within specifications
The acceleration time is set too short
Extend the time in C1-01
Voltage fluctuation of the input power is too large
Check the input voltage
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 7
Table 6.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
Control Power Supply Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit when running
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
External load connected pulling down the Drive power supplies
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB
Remove all control wiring and test Drive
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Contacts on the soft charge contactor are dirty and the soft charge contactor does not function mechanically
Check the condition of the soft charge contactor
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB
WARNING
Some features within the PI function group cause the Drive to shut down momentarily (e.g. Sleep Function,
Snooze Function, Feedback Loss feature etc.) Upon recovery from the conditions that activate these features, the Drive may start unexpectedly. Therefore, when enabling these features take appropriate measures to notify personnel working with this equipment that unexpected starting may occur.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 8
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Drive protection functions that does not operate the fault contact. The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs
(H2-01 to H2-02) if programmed.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate corrective action according to the table below.
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
BUS
Option Com Err
CALL
SI-F/G ComCall
EF
External Fault
EF0
Opt External Flt
(Flashing)
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken, master has stopped communicating
Serial communication transmission error.
Communication has not yet been established
Connection not made properly, user software not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration
Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500mS or more. This alarm stops the motor.
An external forward and reverse command are input simultaneously
Check all connections, verify all user side software configurations.
Check all connections, verify all user side software configurations
Check external sequence logic
Communication Option Card External Fault
An external fault condition exists
Check for an external condition
Verify the parameters
Verify communication signal
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(Flashing)
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(Flashing)
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(Flashing)
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S3
External Fault at Terminal S4
External Fault at Terminal S5
External Fault at Terminal S6
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(Flashing)
DNE
Drive not Enable
(Flashing)
FAN
Cooling Fan Error
External Fault at Terminal S7
The Drive does not have the enable command when the run command is applied
Failure of the Drive internal cooling fan when L8-32=0
An external fault condition exists connected to a multi-function digital input
The Run command has been applied prior to the enable signal
Drive cooling fan has stopped
Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition
Remove the fault from a multifunction digital input
Apply the enable command before applying the run command
Replace the cooling fan
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 9
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
FBL
Feedback Loss
PI Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to fault
(b5-12 = 2) and the
PI Feedback < PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection Time (b5-14)
PI Feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working
Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PI Feedback source signal
Check to ensure the PI Feedback source is installed and working properly
Check the motor for a phase-tophase short
Check the Drive for a phase-tophase short at the output
Verify C1-01 and C1-02 are set correctly
LL3
Loss of Load Det 1
(Flashing)
Loss of Load Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than the time set in L6-03
Motor is underloaded
Check load conditions
Ensure the values in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault
OH
Heatsnk Overtemp
(Flashing)
OH2
Over Heat 2
(Flashing)
Cooling Fin/Cooling Fin Fan Overheat
The temperature of the Drive cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8-02
Cooling fan(s) are not working, high ambient temperature, a heating unit in close proximity to Drive is present
Check for dirt build-up on the fans and cooling fins
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive
Remove the heating unit
Drive Internal Cooling Fan
Drive overheat pre-alarm signal is input from a multi-function digital input terminal
An external overheat condition exists connected to one of the multi-function input terminals
S3, S4, S5, S6 or S7
Check for an external condition
Verify the program parameters
H1-01 thru H1-05
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
(Flashing)
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Drive stops or continues operation according to the setting of L1-03.
Overheating of motor
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02)
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01 thru E1-13)
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01)
Check the digital operator connector
Verify the setting of o2-06
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 10
Table 6.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(Flashing)
OVRD
Emergcy
Override
PRHT
Motor Preheating
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(Flashing)
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
DC Bus Overvoltage
208-240Vac: Trip point is
≥ 400Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is
≥ 800Vdc
Emergency Override
Emergency Override is active
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3
Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications
The deceleration time is set too short
Extend the time in C1-02
Power factor correction capacitors are being used on the input to the Drive
Remove the power factor correction capacitors
When the Forward (H1-0X = 81) or Reverse (H1-0X = 82) Emergency Override multi-function input is closed, the drive will run at either the B1-14 reference (B1-
15 = 0) or the AUTO reference
(B1-15 = 1) and “OVRD Emergency Override” will be displayed on the digital operator.
Forward or Reverse Emergency
Override input is closed
If the Drive Enable
(H1-0X =
6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1-
0X = 70) is programmed, the emergency override function can only be activated when the
Enable input is open. If the
Enable input is closed at any time during emergency override, the drive will stop.
Motor Preheating
Motor is preheating
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running
Motor Preheat 2 input is closed
Contacts on the soft charge contactor are dirty and the soft charge contactor does not function mechanically
- - -
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is
≤ L2-05
208-240Vac: Trip point is
≤ 190Vdc
480Vac: Trip point is
≤ 380Vdc
Low input voltage at R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3
Check the input circuit and increase the input power to within specifications
The acceleration time is set too short
Extend the time in C1-01
Voltage fluctuation of the input power is too large
Check the input voltage
Control Power Supply Undervoltage of the control circuit when running
External load connected pulling down the Drive power supplies
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive
Check the condition of the soft charge contactor
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 11
Operator Programming Errors (OPE)
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate.
The Drive does not operate until the parameter is set correctly. (Alarm output and fault contact do not operate.)
If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6.3.
Table 6.3 OPE Error and Fault Displays
Digital Operator
Display
Description Cause
Corrective
Action
OPE01 kVA Selection t
OPE02
Limit
OPE03
Terminal
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
Drive kVA setting error.
Constant data out of range.
Multi-function input selection fault.
Duplicate functions are selected, up/down commands or trim control increase/decrease are not set simultaneously. Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency are set simultaneously.
Emergency override FWD (H1-0X
= 81) and Emergency Override
REV (H1-0X = 82) are set simultaneously.
Verify program settings
(H1-01~H1-05)
Run command is selected through serial communication at 2CN but option board is not installed.
Serial communication option board is not installed, option board is installed incorrectly. The run command selection parameter
B1-02 is set to 3 and option board is not installed.
Verify that the board is installed.
Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more.
V/f data setting fault
The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter is set incorrectly
Enter the correct kVA setting (o2-04) by referring to the Drive model number in Appendix B
Parameter set above the allowable range.
Verify the program settings
V/f parameter settings are not set correctly.
Check parameters (E1-04 ~ E1-11).
A minimum frequency/voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency/voltage.
OPE11
CarrFrq/On-Delay
Carrier frequency data setting fault.
Carrier frequency proportional gain
C6-05 > 6 and C6-04 > C6-03.
Upper/lower limit error of C6-03 to
5.0kHz
Parameter setting incorrect.
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err It does not match at EEPROM write.
• Power supply is turned OFF.
• Parameter is reset repeatedly.
Check the program settings and correct the errors.
• Cycle power off and on to Drive.
• Do a factory initialization (A1-03).
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 12
Auto-Tuning Faults
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to a stop during operation. The fault contact is not activated.
Digital Operator Display
Table 6.4 Auto-Tuning Displays and Processing
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Er - 01
Fault
Er - 02
Minor Fault
Er - 03
STOP key
Er - 04
Resistance
Er - 12
I-det. Circuit
Er - 13
Leakage Inductance Fault
End - 3
Data Invalid
•There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
•There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
• Check input data.
• Check Drive and motor capacity.
• Check motor rated current.
A minor fault is detected during auto-tuning.
• Check input data.
• Check wirings and around the machine.
• Check the load.
The STOP key is pressed during auto-tuning, and the auto-tuning is interrupted.
–
Auto-tuning is not completed within the specified time.
The auto-tuning result became other than the parameter set range.
• Check input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If a motor and a machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
•Current flow exceeded the motor rated current.
•Current detection value symbol was reversed.
•Any of U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3 has open-phase.
• Check current detection circuit, wiring and mounting procedure.
Auto-tuning did not finish within the set time.
Tuning result became other than the parameter setting range.
• Check motor wiring.
Rated current set value is set too high.
• Check input data (especially, motor output current and motor rated current value).
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 13
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
These faults can occur occurred during the operator COPY function. Fault content is displayed on the operator. An error during the COPY function does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Function
READ
Function
COPY
Function
Verify
Function
Table 6.5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
VYE
VERIFY ERROR o3-01 was set to 1 to write a parameter when the Digital Operator was write-protected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing parameters with the Digital Operator.
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
RDE
DATA ERROR
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
The read data length does not agree.
The write data is incorrect.
An attempted write of a parameter to
EEPROM on the Digital Operator failed.
• Repeat the Read.
• Check the Digital Operator cable.
• Replace digital operator.
• A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
• Repeat the read
• Replace Digital Operator.
The Drive product code or software number is different.
Use COPY function for the same product code and software number.
The capacity of the Drive being copied and the capacity in the Digital Operator are different.
Use COPY function for the same Drive capacity.
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCHED
The control method of the Drive being copied and the control method in the
Digital Operator are different.
Use the COPY function for the same control method.
The parameter written to the Drive was compared with the parameter in the Digital
Operator and they were different.
COPY retest
The checksum in the Drive parameter area was compared with the checksum in the
Digital Operator parameter area and they were different.
Retry the copy.
The set value of the digital operator and the
Drive do not match.
Retry Verify function
After COPY is retested, Verify is retested
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 14
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, etc., the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If this occurs, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If a fault is displayed on the digital operator, refer to Fault Detection, Table 6.1.
If Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Drive is operating (drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Remove the run command and then set the parameters.
Parameter write enable is input.
This occurs when "parameter write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function digital input terminal (H1-01 to H1-05).
If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Operator Programming Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty.
Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 15
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
Ensure the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive.
The motor does not operate when the HAND key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Speed Command (Frequency Reference) is too low.
If the Speed Command (frequency reference) is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate.
Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor does not operate when an external run command is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Drive is not in drive mode.
If the Drive is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key once and press the
DATA/ENTER key. The Drive is now in drive mode.
The Speed Command is too low.
If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate. Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too high. The Drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too great. Lengthen the acceleration time
(CI-01) or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" may be selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the
Drive will not receive reverse run commands. This is the default to use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to 0, and operate in Auto mode.
ê}3.1The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is incorrect. When the Drive U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 terminals are properly connected to the motor, the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is received. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 16
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Acceleration Level) is too low, the acceleration time will be too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited.
Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command
Use the following information if the motor operates at a higher speed than the Speed Command.
A signal is being input to the Speed Command (current) terminal A2.
If a preset frequency reference is selected, the preset reference takes priority over the normal reference.
If the PI mode of operation is enabled, the drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint. Then, the Drive speed may go to maximum.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 17
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too high.
If the motor load is too high and the motor is used when the effective torque exceeds the motor's rated torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded.
Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within its acceptable range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Drive output, Voltage surges are generated by standing waves that can occur with certain combinations of drive carrier frequency and motor cable length. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the
Drive's input power supply voltage (i.e., 1200Vac for a 480Vac). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 480Vac Drive, use an inverter-duty
(NEMA MG1, Parts 30 & 31) motor. Motor protection filter can also be an effective measure.
If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or
Running Drive
If noise is generated by Drive switching, implement the following countermeasures:
1.
Change the Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of internal switching.
2.
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive's input power terminals.
3.
Use metal conduit. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Drive and power wires in metal.
4.
Ground the Drive and motor.
5.
Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 18
If a “Stand-alone” Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run
The Drive performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause an external ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Whenever possible, use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Drives). It will also help to change the Drive's
Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Vibration
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration.
The application is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's natural frequency and the carrier frequency.
This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation, but the machinery vibrates with a high-pitched whine. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between an applications characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the
Drive.
To prevent this from occurring, use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-01 to d3-04, or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by raising the value of C4-02 (Torque
Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter) and then lowering the setting of n1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters.
• Disable integral (I) control
• Reduce the proportional gain (P) until hunting stops
• Reintroduce the integral function, starting with long integral time values, to eliminate the P offset
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 19
If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped, the DC injection braking may be insufficient. If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping after a stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating the motor enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
•
•
Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started, or Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if a motor is turning when it is started and the DC injection braking is insufficient.
This can be prevented by slowing motor rotation by DC injection braking before starting. Increase parameter b2-03 (DC injection braking time at start) setting.
If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command
Input
The Speed Command is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency cannot be set within the jump frequency range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (parameter d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Freq Ref Upper Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04)
× Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 20
Main Circuit Test Procedure
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Before attempting any troubleshooting checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected and locked out. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale.
Check
Measure DC Bus Voltage
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Procedure
1. Set the digital multi-meter to its highest VDC scale.
2. Measure between
⊕ 1 and (-) for the following check:
Place the positive (red) meter lead on
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on (-).
3. If the measured voltage is < 10Vdc, it is safe to work inside the Drive.
If not, wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged.
The input diodes rectify or transform the three-phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
3. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
4. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
5. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
9. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
10. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
(Continued on next page)
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 21
Check
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
Soft Charge Resistor Check
(R1, R2, 6PCB)
Soft Charge Contactor
(K1)
DC Bus Fuse
(F1)
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Procedure
(Continued from previous page)
11.
Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3. If the resistor is damaged, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level.
1. Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3. On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that each contact resistance measures infinite ohms.
4. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, press the plunger in, and verify that each contact measures zero ohms.
5. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, release the plunger, and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor.
6. On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that the contactor coil measures about
300 ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
7. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 230Vac contactor coil measures about 175 ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
8. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2.2M ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states.
The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short. If the DC bus fuse is open, at least one of the output transistors has failed. When a transistor fails, there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors, but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short.
Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 22
Check
Output Transistors
(Q1-Q12)
Control Power Fuse
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Procedure
The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
3. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
4. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
5. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
9. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
10. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
11.
Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕ 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal
⊕1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
All Drives have a Control Power Fuse. The fuse is located on either the Power PCB (3PCB) or the Gate Drive PCB (3PCB). The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 23
Check
24Vdc Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink & Internal)
230/240Vac Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink)
Cooling Fan Fuse
Table 6.6 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Procedure
The Heat Sink & Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the fan motor can be checked with a digital mutli-meter.
3. Set the digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If zero ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is shorted. If infinite ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned open.
5. If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor.
The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the motor can be checked with a digital mutli-meter.
3. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If the fan motor is good, the measured value should be about 500 ohms. If zero ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is shorted. If infinite ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned open.
If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 230/240Vac to the fan to test the motor.
Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse. It is located on either the Gate Drive Board
(3PCB) or the Tap Change Board (8PCB). If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open, then the
230/240Vac cooling fans may be defective.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 24
Drive Date Stamp Information
This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period. The date stamp is located on the lower right side of the Drive.
Fig 6.1 Date Stamp Location
PRD
INSP2
YEA Production
Manufacture Date
Inspector Number
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 25
Notes:
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 26
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive. Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance.
Periodic Inspection..................................................................... 7-2
Preventive Maintenance ............................................................ 7-3
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement .......................................... 7-4
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card .............................. 7-6
Maintenance 7 - 1
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Drive specification of -10
°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
The output current value shown in parameter U1-03 should not be higher than the motor rated current for an extended period of time.
The cooling fan in the Drive should be operating normally.
Always turn OFF the input power before beginning inspection. Confirm that the digital operator indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait an additional five minutes before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock. Please refer to Warnings on page i.
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Item
External terminals, mounting bolts, connectors, etc.
Cooling fins
Control PCB
Terminal PCB
Power PCB
Gate Drive PCBs
Input Diodes
IPMs
Output Transistors
DC bus capacitors
Table 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied
Inspection Corrective Action
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Are connectors tight?
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the
PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?
Are there any irregularities, such as
discoloration or odor?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Replace the capacitors or Drive.
Apply power to the Drive and conduct the following inspection.
Item
Cooling fan(s)
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied
Inspection Corrective Action
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours?
Check U1-40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time.
Replace Cooling Fan
Maintenance 7 - 2
Preventive Maintenance
Inspection Points
General
AC Power Circuit &
Devices
Control Circuits
Cooling System
Keypad/Display
Item
Environment
Equipment
AC Power Supply
Conductors & Wire
Connections
Transformers & Reactors
Terminal Blocks
DC Bus Capacitors
Relays & Contactors
Soft Charge Resistors
Operation
Digital Operator
Table 7.3 Preventive Maintenance
Cooling Fans/Fins & Heatsink
Check Points
Ambient Temperature
Humidity
Dust
Harmful Gas
Oil Mist
Abnormal vibration or noise
Main circuit & control voltage
Loose lugs, screws & wires
Hot spots on parts
Corrosion
Bent conductors
Breakage, cracking or discoloration
Check spacing
Discoloration or Noise
Loose, damaged
Leakage
Ruptures, broken, expansion
Capacitance & insulation resistance
Noisy
Contact discoloration
Cracked
Discoloration
Speed reference voltage/current
I/O contact operation
Abnormal fan noise
Loose connectors
Free of accumulation
LEDs
Monitor display values
Key functionality
Clean
Every 3-6 Months
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Yearly
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If the Drive is used under the following conditions, it may be necessary to inspect more often:
•
High ambient temperatures, humidity or altitudes above 3,300 feet
•
Frequent starting and stopping
•
Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load
•
Excessive vibration and/or shock loading
•
Poor environment, including dust, metal particles, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine
Maintenance 7 - 3
Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement
Models CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2018 (25HP @ 208V/240V) and 40P4 thru 4018
(30HP @ 480V)
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive.
If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive heatsink, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel.
If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure.
Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan
1.
Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2.
Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1” and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow “2”.
3.
Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector. See Fig 7.1
4.
Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows “3” and remove the fan cover from the fan.
3
3
Power
Connector
Fig 7.1 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure
Installing the Heatsink Cooling Fan
1.
Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the
Drive.
2.
Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover.
3.
Mount the fan cover on the Drive. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive.
Maintenance 7 - 4
Models CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 (30HP to 150HP @ 208V/240V) and 4024 thru
4300 (40HP to 500HP @ 480V)
A cooling fan assembly is attached to the top inside the Drive. The cooling fan assembly includes the heat sink cooling fans and the internal cooling fan. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan Assembly
1.
Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2.
Remove the terminal cover, Drive cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Drive.
3.
Remove the Control PCB bracket (if necessary) to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the
Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board (13 PCB) positioned near the top of the
Drive.
4.
Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board (3PCB) positioned at the back of the Drive.
5.
Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive.
6.
Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Cooling Fan Assembly
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive.
Control PCB bracket
Control PCB
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 7.2 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure
Maintenance 7 - 5
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
IMPORTANT
Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.
Removing the Terminal Card
1.
Remove the terminal cover on the Drive.
2.
Remove the Digital Operator and front cover on the Drive.
3.
Remove the wires connected to FE and NC on the terminal card.
4.
Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free. It is not necessary to remove the mounting screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
5.
Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow.
Mounting the Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the Control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be bent if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Drive operation.
CN8
FE NC
Mounting Screw Mounting Screw
Fig 7.3 Terminal Card Removal Procedure
Maintenance 7 - 6
Appendix A
Parameters
This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names, along with a description of each. Also, below the parameter name in bold type is the abbreviated name as it appears on the digital operator display/keypad.
Parameter List............................................................................ A-2
Monitor List .............................................................................. A-26
Fault Trace List ........................................................................ A-28
Fault History List ...................................................................... A-29
Decimal to Hex Conversion: .................................................... A-30
Parameters A - 1
Parameter List
Table A.1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
A1-00
A1-01
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
Language Selection
Select Language
Access Level Selection
Access Level
Initialize Parameters
Init Parameters
Password 1
Enter Password
Password 2
Select Password
Description
Initialization
Language selection for digital operator display
0: English
2: Deutsch
3: Francais
4: Italiano
5: Espanol
6: Portugues
*Not returned to factory setting by initialization
This setting determines which parameters are accessible.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level
2: Advanced Level
Used to return all parameters to their factory or user setting.
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize (The user must set their own parameter default values and then parameter o2-03 must be set to “1” to save them. If the parameter values are changed after o2-03 is set to “1”, the user default values can be restored by setting A1-03 to 1110)
2220: 2-Wire Initial
3330: 3-Wire Initial
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03 and A2-32 cannot be changed.
All other parameters determined by A1-01 can be changed. Parameter
A1-05 can be accessed by displaying parameter A1-04, then press and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously.
User Parameters
A2-01
User Parameter 1
User Param 1
A2-02
User Parameter 2
User Param 2
Setting
Range
0 to 6
0 to 2
0 to
3330
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
Factory
Setting
0
2
0
0
0
–
–
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
A2-03
User Parameter 3
User Param 3
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level (A1-
01 = 1). These are the only parameters accessible for the user level.
These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function.
A2-04
User Parameter 4
User Param 4
A2-05
A2-06
User Parameter 5
User Param 5
User Parameter 6
User Param 6
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
b1-01 to o3-02
–
–
–
–
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 2
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
A2-07
A2-08
A2-09
A2-10
A2-11
A2-12
A2-13
A2-14
A2-15
A2-16
A2-17
A2-18
A2-19
A2-20
A2-21
A2-22
A2-23
A2-24
A2-25
A2-26
A2-27
A2-28
A2-29
A2-30
A2-31
A2-32
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
User Parameter 7
User Param 7
User Parameter 8
User Param 8
User Parameter 9
User Param 9
User Parameter 10
User Param 10
User Parameter 11
User Param 11
User Parameter 12
User Param 12
User Parameter 13
User Param 13
User Parameter 14
User Param 14
User Parameter 15
User Param 15
User Parameter 16
User Param 16
User Parameter 17
User Param 17
User Parameter 18
User Param 18
User Parameter 19
User Param 19
User Parameter 20
User Param 20
User Parameter 21
User Param 21
User Parameter 22
User Param 22
User Parameter 23
User Param 23
User Parameter 24
User Param 24
User Parameter 25
User Param 25
User Parameter 26
User Param 26
User Parameter 27
User Param 27
User Parameter 28
User Param 28
User Parameter 29
User Param 29
User Parameter 30
User Param 30
User Parameter 31
User Param 31
User Parameter 32
User Param 32
Description
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level
(A1-01 = 1). These are the only parameters accessible for the user level. These parameters are not related to the User Initialize function.
Setting
Range b1-01 to o3-02
Factory
Setting
–
Menu
Location
Programming
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 3
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-07 b1-08 b1-11 b1-12 b1-13 b1-14 b1-15 b2-01 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Stopping Method Selection
Stopping Method
Reverse Operation Selection
Reverse Oper
Local/Remote Run Selection
LOC/REM RUN Sel
Run Command Selection
During Program
RUN CMD at PRG
Drive Delay Time Setting
Wait to Run Time
Hand Frequency Reference
Selection
HAND Fref Source
HAND/AUTO During Run
Selection
HAND/AUTO @Run
Emergency Override Speed
E Override Speed
Emergency Override
Reference Selection
E OverrideRefSel
DC Injection Braking Start
Frequency
DCInj Start Freq
DC Injection Braking
Current
DCInj Current
DC Injection Braking Time at
Start
DCInj Time @Start
DC Injection Braking Time at
Stop
DCInj Time @Stop
Sequence
Selects the speed command (frequency reference) input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2 see parameter H3-13)
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - "Hand" and "Off" keys on digital operator
1: Terminals - Contact Closure on Terminal S1
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast w/Timer (A new run command is ignored if input before the time in C1-02 expires)
Determines the forward rotation of the motor, and if reverse operation is disabled.
0: Reverse Enabled
1: Reverse Disabled
2: Exchange Phase - Change direction of forward motor rotation
3: Exchange Phase, Reverse Disabled - Change direction of forward motor rotation and disable reverse operation
0: Cycle External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from hand (local) mode to auto (remote) mode, the drive will not run
1: Accept External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from hand (local) mode to auto (remote) mode, the drive
WILL run
0: Disabled - Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
1: Enabled - Run command accepted in all menus
(except when b1-02 = 0)
After a run command, drive output will start after this delay time.
Selects the speed command input source in hand mode.*
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2 see parameter H3-13)
Note: Bumpless transfer between Hand/Auto is only available with setting “0”.
Selects if drive will permit switching between HAND and AUTO
modes while running.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when b1-15=0.
Selects the emergency override reverse source.
0: Use b1-14 Ref
1: Use AUTO Ref
DC Braking
Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop (b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1-09, DC Injection braking starts at E1-09.
Selects the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the
Drive rated current.
Sets the time length of DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second.
When b1-03 = 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows: b2-04 * 10 * Output Frequency / E1-04. When b1-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp. This should be set to a minimum of 0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely.
Setting
Range
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 600
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.00 to
120.00 Hz
0 or 1
0.0 to 10.0
0 to 100
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 to
10.00
Factory
Setting
1
1
0
1
0
0
0sec
0
0
0.00
0
0.5Hz
50%
0.00sec
0.00sec
Menu
Location
Quick Setting
Quick Setting
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 4
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
* If b1-13=1, this parameter instead selects whether the AUTO reference is retained as the new HAND reference (setting=0), or the drive will ramp from the AUTO reference to the existing HAND reference (setting=1).
b2-09
Motor Pre-Heat Current
Preheat Current
Motor Pre-heat current in % of drive rated current. This is used to keep the motor warm to prevent condensation and is used in conjunction with a digital input (data = 60).
0 to100 0% Programming b2-10 b3-01
Motor Pre-Heat Current 2
Preheat Current2
Speed Search Selection
SpdSrch at Start
Sets the DC preheat current for multi-function output setting 80
(Motor Preheat 2) as a percentage of Motor Rated Current (E2-01).
Speed Search
Enables/disables and selects the speed search function at start.
0: SpdsrchF Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(estimated speed method is used at other times)
1: SpdsrchF Enable - Speed search is enabled
(estimated speed method)
2: SpdsrchI Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(current detection method is used at other times)
3: SpdscrhI Enable - Speed search is enabled
(current detection method)
Estimated Speed Method:
Actual motor speed and direction is estimated, then the motor is ramped from that speed to the commanded speed.
Current Detection Method:
Current level is monitored while output frequency is ramped down.
0 to 10%
0 to 3
5
2
Programming
Programming b3-02 b3-03 b3-05 b3-14
Speed Search Deactivation
Current
SpdSrch Current
Speed Search Deceleration
Time
SpdSrch Dec Time
Speed Search Delay Time
Search Delay
Bidirectional Speed Search
Selection
Bidir Search Sel
Used only when b3-01 = 3. Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage of drive rated current.
Used only when b3-01 = 3. Sets the deceleration time during speed search.
Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to allow time for an external output contactor to re-energize.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 200
0.1 to 10.0
0.0 to
20.0sec
0 or 1
120%
2.0sec
0.2sec
1
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming b4-01 b4-02
Timer Function ON-Delay
Time
Delay-ON Timer
Timer Function OFF-Delay
Time
Delay-OFF Timer
Delay Timers
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened.
PI Control
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0sec
0.0sec
Programming
Programming b5-01
PI Mode Setting
PI Mode
This parameter enables / disables the closed loop (PI) controller.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (commanded speed becomes PI setpoint)
3: Fref+PI
0, 1, 3 0 Quick Setting b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting
P Gain
Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller.
0.00 to
25.00
2.00
b5-03 b5-04 b5-06 b5-07
Integral Time Setting
PI I Time
Integral Limit Setting
PI I Limit
PI Output Limit
PI Limit
PI Offset Adjustment
PI Offset
Sets the integral time for the PI controller. A setting of zero disables integral control.
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. Set as a % of fmax.
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PI controller. Set as a % of fmax.
Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PI controller. Set as a % of fmax.
The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses.
Parameter b5-07 serves different functions depending on whether it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop.
1: Parameter b5-07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the
PI function in a non-Differential PI loop. Every time the PI output is updated, the offset is summed with the PI output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PI loop.
2: If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation
(H3-09=16), then the PI Offset is the targeted maintained differential between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog input A2.
0.0 to 360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
100.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
5.0sec
100%
100.0%
0.0%
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running. * Menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
Quick Setting*
Quick Setting*
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 5
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
b5-08
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
PI Primary Delay Time
Constant
PI Delay Time
b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12
PI Output Level Selection
Output Level Sel
PI Output Gain Setting
Output Gain
PI Output Reverse Selection
Output Rev Sel
PI Feedback Reference
Missing Detection Selection
Fb los Det Sel
Description
Sets the amount of time for a filter on the output of the PI controller.
Determines whether the PI controller will be direct or reverse acting.
0: Normal Output (direct acting)
1: Reverse Output (reverse acting)
Sets the output gain of the PI controller.
0: 0 limit (when PI output goes negative Drive stops)
1: Reverse (when PI goes negative Drive reverses)
0 limit automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04
0: Disabled
1: Alarm
2: Fault b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19
PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level
Fb los Det Lvl
PI Feedback Loss Detection
Time
Fb los Det Time
Sleep Function Start
Level
Sleep Level
Sleep Delay Time
Sleep Time
PI Accel/Decel Time
Acc/Dec Time
PI Setpoint Selection
PI Setpoint Sel
PI Setpoint Value
PI Setpoint
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
Sets the PI feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds.
Sets the sleep function start frequency.
Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds.
Applies an accel/decel time to the PI setpoint reference.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Depends on b5-20.
Setting
Range
0.00 to
10.00
Factory
Setting
0.00sec
Menu
Location
Programming
0 or 1
0.0 to 25.0
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 to 100
0.0 to 25.5
0.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 25.5
0.0 to 25.5
0 or 1
0.00 to
100.00** b5-20
PI Setpoint Display Scaling
Setpoint Scaling
Set display/setting Unit of b5-19, U1-24, and U1-38.
0 to 39999 b5-21
PI Sleep Input Source
PI Sleep Source
Input Source Selection for Sleep function Mode.
0: PI Setpoint
1: SFS Input (This is near the PI output)
2: Snooze
Sets the PI snooze function start level as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
0 to 2 b5-22 b5-23
PI Snooze Level
Snooze Level
PI Snooze Delay Time
Snooze Delay Time
Sets the PI snooze function delay time in terms of seconds.
0 to 100
0 to 3600 b5-24 b5-25 b5-26
PI Snooze Deactivation Level
Wake-Up Level
When the PI feedback drops below this level, normal PI operation starts again. Set as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
PI Setpoint Boost Setting
Setpoint Boost
PI Maximum Boost Time
Max Boost Time
Temporary increase of PI setpoint to create an overshoot of the intended PI setpoint.
Sets a time limitation for reaching temporarily boosted PI setpoint
(intended PI setpoint + b5-25).
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 3600 b5-27
PI Snooze Feedback Level
Snooze Feedback
PI snooze mode will be activated when PI feedback is above this level. Set as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
0 to 100
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running. ** Range depends on b5-20 setting. Units depend on b5-31 setting.
0
1.0
0
0
0%
1.0sec
0.0Hz
0.0sec
0.0sec
0
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
0.00% Programming
1
1
0%
0sec
0%
0%
0sec
60%
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 6
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
b5-28 b5-29 b5-30
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
PI Feedback Square Root
Function Selection
PI Feedback SqRt
PI Square Root Gain
PI Fb SqRt Gain
Output Square Root
Monitor Selection
PI Out Moni SqRt
b5-31 b8-01 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
PI Unit Selection
PI Unit Sel
Energy Saving Control
Selection
Energy Save Sel
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Energy Save COEF
Power Detection Filter Time
kW Filter Time
Search Operation Voltage
Limit
Search V Limit
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets units for b5-19, U1-24, U1-38.
0: WC:InchOfWater
1: PSI:lb/SqrInch
2: GPM:Gallons/Min
3: F:DegFahrenheit
4: CFM:Cubic ft/Min
5: CMH:Cubic M/Hr
6: LPH:Liters/Hr
7: LPS:Liters/Sec
8: Bar:Bar
9: Pa:Pascals
10:C:DegCelsius
11:Mtr:Meters
Energy Saving
Energy Savings function enable/disable selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function.
Setting
Range
0 or 1
0.00 to 2.00
0 or 1
0 to 11
0 or 1
0.0 to
655.00
0 to 2000
0 to 100
Factory
Setting
0
1.00
0
0
0
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Quick
Setting* kVA
Dependent
Programming
20ms
0%
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
Acceleration Time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Decel Time 1
Acceleration Time 2
Accel Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel / Decel
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input.
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi-function input.
0.0
to
6000.0
30.0sec
30.0sec
30.0sec
30.0sec
Quick Setting
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
C1-09
Fast Stop Time
Fast Stop Time
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for the
"Fast Stop" function.
0.0
to
6000.0
10.0sec
Programming
C1-11
Accel/Decel
Switch Frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel / decel times.
Fout < C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 2
Fout >= C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 1
Multi-function input "Multi-Acc/Dec 1" has priority over C1-11.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0Hz
Programming
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running. * Menu location is Programming when PI is disabled and Quick Setting when PI is enabled.
Parameters A - 7
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
S-Curve Acc/Dec
S-curve is used to further soften the starting ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting ramp.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
C2-01
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel Start
SCrv Acc @ Start
0.00 to
2.50
0.20sec
Programming
Run command
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
OFF
C2-02
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel End
SCrv Acc @ End
C2-01
0.00 to 2.50
0.20sec
Programming
Time
C4-01
C4-02
C6-01
C6-02
Torque Compensation Gain
Torq Comp Gain
Torque Compensation
Primary Delay Time
Torq Comp Time
Normal Duty Selection
Normal Duty Sel
Carrier Frequency Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Torque Comp
This parameter helps to produce better starting torque. It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current and motor resistance.
This parameter adjusts a filter on the output of the torque compensation function. Increase to add torque stability, decrease to improve torque response.
Carrier Freq
1: Normal Duty 1
2: Normal Duty 2
Carrier frequency sets the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform.
0: Low Noise (Carrier frequency is randomly moduled for lower audible noise)
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
F: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05)
C6-03
C6-04
Carrier Frequency Upper
Limit
CarrierFreq Max
Carrier Frequency Lower
Limit
CarrierFreq Min
Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain
CarrierFreq Gain
Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
C6-05 d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04
Frequency Reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4
Reference 4
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when
C6-02 = F.
Preset Reference (Speeds)
Digital preset speed command 1. Used when b1-01 = 0 and when in
"hand" mode. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Digital preset speed command 2. Selected via multi-function input terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Digital preset speed command 3. Selected via multi-function input terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Digital preset speed command 4. Selected via multi-function input terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference
Jog Reference
Speed command used when a jog is selected via multi-function input terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
0.00 to 2.50
0 to 10000
1 or 2
0 to F
0.4 to 15.0
kHz
0.4 to 15.0
kHz
0 to 99
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
1.00
200ms
2
Programming
Programming
Programming kVA
Dependent
Programming kVA
Dependent
Programming kVA
Dependent
Programming
0
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
6.00Hz
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 8
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
d2-01 d2-02 d2-03 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04 d4-01 d4-02
Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
Ref Upper Limit
Frequency Reference Lower
Limit
Ref Lower Limit
Master Speed Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower Limit
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
Jump Frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
Jump Frequency Width
Jump Bandwidth
MOP Ref Memory
Trim Control Level
Trim Control Lvl
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Reference Limits
Determines maximum speed command, set as a percentage of parameter E1-04. If speed command is above this value, actual drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to all speed command sources.
Determines minimum speed command, set as a percentage of
parameter E1-04. If speed command is below this value, actual drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter applies to all speed command sources.
Determines the minimum speed command, set as a percentage of parameter E1-04. If speed command is below this value, actual drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter only applies to analog inputs A1 and A2.
Jump Frequencies
Setting
Range
0.0 to 110.0
0.0 to 110.0
0.0 to 110.0
Factory
Setting
100.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0Hz
These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
0.0 to 200.0
0.0Hz
0.0Hz
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency point. A setting of "1.0" will result in a deadband of +/- 1.0 Hz.
MOP and Trim Control
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set the percentage of maximum speed to be added or subtracted via multi-function inputs.
0.0 to 20.0
0 or 1
0 to 100
1.0Hz
0
10%
Menu
Location
Quick Setting
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 9
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Description
V/F Pattern
Setting
Range
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line.
155 to 255.0
(240V)
310 to 510.0
(480V)
V/F Pattern Selection
V/F Selection
0: 50Hz
1: 60 Hz Saturation
2: 50 Hz Saturation
3: 72 Hz
4: 50 Hz VT1
5: 50 Hz VT2
6: 60 Hz VT1
7: 60 Hz VT2
8: 50 Hz HST1
9: 50 Hz HST2
A: 60 Hz HST1
B: 60 Hz HST2
C: 90 Hz
D: 120 Hz
F: Custom V/F
FF:Custom w/o limit
Maximum Output Frequency
Max Frequency
Maximum Output Voltage
Max Voltage
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
Base Frequency
Base Frequency
Mid Output Frequency A
Mid Frequency A
Mid Output Voltage A
Mid Voltage A
Minimum Output Frequency
Min Frequency
Mid Output Voltage
Min Voltage
VA
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10)
FMIN FA FBASE FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be} disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX)
≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
0 to FF
0.0 to
120.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 to 200.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0 to 200.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
Factory
Setting
240V
480V
F
60.0Hz
230.0V
460.0V
60.0Hz
3.0Hz
18.0VAC
Programming
1.5Hz
Menu
Location
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
10.8VAC
Programming
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Frequency B
Mid Output Voltage B
Mid Voltage B
Base Voltage
Base Voltage
Set only when V/f is finely adjusted at rated output range.
Adjustment is not normally required.
0.0 to
200.0
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0Hz
0.0VAC
0.0VAC
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 10
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
E2-01
E2-03
E2-05
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-05
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Motor Setup
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.
No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Term Resistance
Operation Selection after
Communication Error
Comm Bus Flt Sel
Sets the magnetizing current of the motor.
Phase to phase motor resistance, normally set by the autotuning routine.
Com OPT Setup
Sets the stopping method for option PCB communications error
(BUS fault). Active only when a communications option PCB is installed and when b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Detection Selection of External Fault from Communication Option Card
EF0 Detection
Stopping Method for
External Fault from
Communication Option Card
EF0 Fault Action
Current Monitor Display Unit
Selection
Current Unit Sel
0: Always detected
1: Detected only during run
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0: A Display (Amps Display)
1: 100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
10% to
200% kVA
Dependent
0.000 to
65.000
kVA
Dependent
Quick Setting kVA
Dependent kVA
Dependent
Programming
Programming
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 or 1
1 Programming
0 Programming
1 Programming
0 Programming
Parameters A - 11
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
H1-01
H1-02
Terminal S3 Function
Selection
Terminal S3 Sel
Terminal S4 Function
Selection
Terminal S4 Sel
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Digital Inputs
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
0: 3-wire control
FWD/REV selection for 3-wire sequence
1: Local/Remote Sel
Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Hand, Open = Auto
2: Option/Inv Sel
Selects source of speed command and sequence
Closed = b1-01 & b1-02, Open = Option Card
3: Multi-Step Ref 1
Closed = speed command from d1-02 or Aux Terminal
Open = speed command determined by b1-01
4: Multi-Step Ref 2
Closed = speed command from d1-03 or d1-04
Open speed command determined by b1-01
6: Jog Freq Ref
Closed = speed command from d1-17
Open = speed command determined by b1-01
7: Multi-Acc/Dec 1
Closed = Accel & Decel Ramps determined by C1-03 & C1-04,
Open = Accel & Decel Ramps determined by C1-01 & C1-02
8: Ext BaseBlk N.O.
Closed = Output transistors forced off
Open = Normal operation
9: Ext BaseBlk N.C.
Closed = Normal Operation
Open = Output transistors forced off
A: Acc/Dec Ramp Hold
Closed = Acceleration suspended and speed held
Open = Normal Operation
C: Term A2 Enable
Closed = Terminal A2 is active
Open = Terminal A2 is disabled
F: Term Not Used
Terminal has no effect
10: MOP Increase
Closed = Speed Command Increases
Open = Speed Command Held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1-02 must be set to 1.
11: MOP Decrease
Closed = Speed Command Decreases
Open = Speed Command Held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1-02 must be set to 1.
(Continued on following page).
0 to 6E
0 to 6E
24
14
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 12
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
H1-03
Terminal S5 Function
Selection
Terminal S5 Sel
Description
12: Forward Jog
Closed = drive runs forward at speed command entered into parameter d1-17
13: Reverse Jog
Closed = drive runs in reverse at speed command entered into parameter d1-17
14: Fault Reset
Closed = Resets the drive after the fault and the run command have been removed
15: Fast-Stop N.O.
Closed = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run command status
17: Fast-Stop N.C.
Closed = Normal operation
Open = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run command status
18: Timer Function
Input for independent timer, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital output.
19: PI Disable
Turns off the PI controller, and PI setpoint becomes speed command
1B: Program Lockout
Closed =All parameter settings can be changed.
Open = Only speed command at U1-01 can be changed.
1C: TrimCtl Increase
Closed = Increase motor speed by value in d4-02.
Open = Return to normal speed command.
Not effective when using d1-01 thru d1-04 as a speed command.
Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease.
1D: Trim Ctl Decrease
Closed = Decrease motor speed by value in d4-02
Open = Return to normal speed command.
Not effective when using d1-01 thru d1-04 as speed command.
Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
0 to 6E
3: 2-wire
3-wire
Programming
Parameters A - 13
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
H1-04
H1-05
Terminal S6 Function
Selection
Terminal S6 Sel
Terminal S7 Function
Selection
Terminal S7 Sel
Description
Digital Inputs
1E: Ref Sample Hold
Analog speed command is sampled then held at time of input closure.
20: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
21: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Ramp To
Stop
22: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Coast To Stop
25: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Coast To
Stop
26: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Coast To Stop
27: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Coast To Stop
28: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
29: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
2A: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Fast-Stop
2B: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Fast-Stop
2C: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Alarm Only
2D: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Alarm Only
2E: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Alarm Only
2F: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Alarm Only
30: PI Integral Reset
Resets the PI Integral component to zero when closed
31: PI Integral Hold
Holds the PI integral value when closed
34: PI SFS Cancel (SFS= SoftStart, also called Accel/Decel,
See Parameter b5-17)
35: PI Input Level Sel
Inverts the PI error signal when closed
36: Option/Inv Sel 2 Selects source of speed command and sequence
Closed = Option Card, Open = b1-01 & b1-02
60: Motor Preheat
Applies current to create heat to avoid condensation
Closed = Apply amount of current as set in parameter b2-09
61: Speed Search 1
When closed as a run command is given, drive does a speed search starting at maximum frequency (E1-04). (current detection)
62: Speed Search 2
When closed as a run command is given, drive does a speed search starting at speed command. (current detection)
64: Speed Search 3
When opened, the Drive performs a baseblock (motor coasts).
When closed, the Drive performs Speed Search from set frequency.
67: Com Test Mode - Used to test RS-485/422 interface.
68: High Slip Braking - Closed = Drive stops using High Slip
Braking regardless of run command status.
69: Jog2 - Closed = Drive runs at speed command entered into parameter d1-17. Direction determined by fwd/rev input.
3-wire control Only.
6A: Drive Enable - Closed = Drive will accept run command.
Open = Drive will not run.
If running, drive will stop per b1-03.
Run Command must be cycled
6B: Com/Inv Sel - Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence.
Closed = Serial Communication (R+,R-,S+,S-), Open = b1-01 & b1-02
6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 - Selects source of Speed Command and
Sequence.
Closed = b1-01 & b1-02, Open = Serial Communication
(R+,R-,S+,S-)
6D: Auto Mode Sel - Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Auto, Open
= Hand
6E: Hand Mode Sel - Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Hand, Open
= Auto
70: Bypass/Drv Enbl. Same as 6A except a run command is accepted
80: Motor Preheat 2 - Closed = Enable motor preheat with the current level as set by b2-10
81: EmergOverrideFWD - Closed = Forward Emergency
Override Command
82: EmergOverrideREV - Closed = Reverse Emergency
Override Command
Setting
Range
0 to 6E
0 to 6E
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
4: 2-wire
3: 3-wire
Programming
6: 2-wire
4: 3-wire
Programming
Parameters A - 14
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
H2-01
H2-02
Terminal M1-M2 Function
Selection
Term M1-M2 Sel
Terminal M3-M4 Function
Selection
Term M3-M4 Sel
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Description
Digital Outputs
0: During RUN 1 = Closed when a run command is input or the drive is outputting voltage.
1: Zero Speed = Closed when drive output frequency is less than Fmin (E1-09)
2: Fref/Fout Agree 1 = Closed when drive output speed equals the speed command within the bandwidth of L4-02.
3: Fref/Set Agree 1 = Closed when the drive output speed and the speed command are equal to the value in L4-01 within the bandwidth of L4-02.
4: Freq Detect 1 = Closed when the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-01, with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
5: Freq Detect 2 = Closed when the drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in
L4-01, with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
6: Inverter Ready = Closed when the drive is not in a fault state, and not in program mode.
7: DC Bus Undervolt = Closed when the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip level (L2-05)
8: Base Blk 1 = Closed when the drive is not outputting voltage.
9: Operator Reference = Closed when the speed command is coming from the digital operator.
A: Remote/Auto Oper = Closed when the run command is coming from the digital operator.
B: Trq Det 1 N.O. - Closes when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter
L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
C: Loss of Ref - Closes when the drive has detected a loss of analog speed command.
Speed command is considered lost when it drops 90% in 0.4 seconds.
Parameter L4-05 determines drive reaction to a loss of speed command.
D: DB Overheat
E: Fault - Closes when the drive experiences a major fault.
F: Not Used
10: Minor Fault - Closes when drive experiences a minor fault or alarm.
11: Reset Cmd Active - Closes when the drive receives a reset command from terminals or serial comms.
12: Timer Output - Output for independent timer, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input.
17: Trq. Det 1 N.C. - Opens when the output current exceeds the value set in parameter
L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
1A: Reverse Dir - Closes when the drive is running in the reverse direction.
1E: Restart Enabled - Closes when the drive is performing an automatic restart.
Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5-01.
1F: Overload (OL1) - Closes before a motor overload occurs. (90% of OL1 time)
20: OH Prealarm - Closes when the Drive’s heatsink temperature exceeds the setting of parameter L8-02.
38: Drive Enable - Closes when the drive enable input is active.
39: Waiting to Run - Closes during the time after a run command is issued, but the Drive is not running due to the time set in parameter b1-10.
3A: OH Freq Reduce
3B: Run Src Com/Opt
3D: Cooling Fan Err = Closed during internal cooling fan failure
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to 3B
0 to 3B
0
A
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 15
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Analog Inputs
H3-02
H3-03
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
Terminal A1 Gain Setting
Terminal A1 Gain
Terminal A1 Bias Setting
Terminal A1 Bias
Terminal A2 Signal Level
Selection
Term A2 Signal
Aux Terminal Function Selection
Terminal A2 Sel
Terminal A2 Gain Setting
Terminal A2 Gain
Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Terminal A2 Bias
Sets the speed command when 10V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Sets the speed command when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Selects the signal level of terminal A2.
0: 0 - 10VDC (switch S1-2 must be in the off position)
2: 4 - 20 mA (switch S1-2 must be in the on position)
Selects what effect the Aux terminal (A2) has on the drive.
0: Frequency Bias - 0 - 100% bias
2: Aux Reference
B: PI Feedback
D: Frequency Bias 2 - 0 - 100% bias
E: Motor Temperature - See parameters L1-03 & L1-04
16: PI Differential
1F: Not Used
Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a
10V input (in%).
Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a
0V input (in%).
H3-12
H3-13
Analog Input Filter Time Constant
Filter Avg Time
Master Frequency Reference
Terminal Selection
TA1/A2 Select
Used to "smooth" out erratic or noisy analog input signals.
Determines which terminal will be the main reference source.
0: Main Fref TA1 - Terminal TA1 is the main speed command and Terminal TA2 is the Aux speed command.
1: Main Fref TA2 - Terminal TA2 is the main speed command and Terminal TA1 is the Aux speed command.
Only effective when H3-09 is set to 2 "Aux Reference".
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
* Menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
** Factory setting changes to “B” when b5-01=1.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
1000.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
0 or 2
0 to 1F
0.0 to
1000.0
–100.0 to
+100.0
0.00 to
2.00
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
100.0%
0.0%
2
2**
100.0%
0.0%
0.30sec
0
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming*
Programming*
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming*
Parameters A - 16
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Analog Outputs
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
Terminal FM Monitor Selection
Terminal FM Sel
Terminal FM Gain Setting
Terminal FM Gain
Terminal FM Bias Setting
Terminal FM Bias
Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and AC.
1: Frequency Ref (100% = max. output frequency)
2: Output Freq (100% = max. output frequency)
3: Output Current (100% = drive rated current)
6: Output Voltage (100% = 230V or 100% = 460V)
7: DC Bus Voltage (100% = 400V or 100% = 800V)
8: Output kWatts (100% = drive rated power)
15: Term A1 Level
16: Term A2 Level
18: Mot SEC Current (100% = Motor rated secondary current)
20: SFS Output (100% = max. output frequency)
24: PI Feedback
31: Not Used
36: PI Input
37: PI Output (100% = max. output frequency)
38: PI Setpoint
51: Auto Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
52: Hand Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
53: PI Feedback 2
NOTE: 100% = 10V DC output * FM gain setting
(H4-02).
Sets terminal FM output voltage (in percent of 10V) when selected monitor is at 100% output.
Sets terminal FM output voltage (in percent of 10V) when selected monitor is at 0% output.
H4-04
H4-05
Terminal AM Monitor Selection
Terminal AM Sel
Terminal AM Gain Setting
Terminal AM Gain
Selects which monitor will be output on terminals AM and AC.
1: Frequency Ref (100% = max. output frequency)
2: Output Freq (100% = max. output frequency)
3: Output Current (100% = drive rated current)
6: Output Voltage (100% = 230V or 100% = 460V)
7: DC Bus Voltage (100% = 400V or 100% = 800V)
8: Output kWatts (100% = drive rated power)
15: Term A1 Level
16: Term A2 Level
18: Mot SEC Current (100% = Motor rated secondary current)
20: SFS Output (100% = max. output frequency)
24: PI Feedback
31: Not Used
36: PI Input
37: PI Output (100% = max. output frequency)
38: PI Setpoint
51: Auto Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
52: Hand Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
53: PI Feedback 2
NOTE: 100% = 10V DC output * AM gain setting
(H4-05).
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10V) when selected monitor is at 100% output.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
1 to 53
0.0 to
1000.0
–110.0 to
110.0
1 to 53
0.0 to
1000.0
2
100.0%
0.0%
Programming
Programming
8
50.0%
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 17
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Parameter
No.
H4-06
H4-07
H4-08
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Terminal AM Bias Setting
Terminal AM Bias
Terminal FM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select1
Terminal AM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select2
Description
Analog Outputs
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10V) when selected monitor is at 0% output.
0: 0 - 10 VDC
2: 4-20 mA*
0: 0 - 10 VDC
2:4-20 mA*
* An analog output of 4 - 20 mA can not be used with the standard terminal board. Therefore an optional terminal board (with shunt connector CN15) is needed.
Serial Com Setup
Setting
Range
–110.0 to
110.0
0 or 2
0 or 2
H5-01
Drive Node Address
Serial Comm Adr
Selects drive station node number (address) for terminals R+, R-, S+, S-.*
An address of “0” disables serial com.
0 to 20
(H5-08=0)
0 to FF
(H5-08=1)
0 to 63
(H5-08=2)
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
H5-08
Communication Speed Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Communication Parity Selection
Serial Com Sel
Stopping Method after
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Communication Error Detection
Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Communication Protocol
Selection
Protocol Select
Selects the baud rate for terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-.*
0: 1200 Baud
1: 2400 Baud
2: 4800 Baud (APOGEE FLN)
3: 9600 Baud (Metasys N2)
4: 19200 Baud
Selects the communication parity for terminals R+, R-,
S+ and S-.*
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
4: Run at d1-04 - available when H5-08=
“1: N2 METASYS” or “2: FLN APOGEE”
Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function.
0: Disabled - A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault.
1: Enabled - If communications are lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5-09, a communications fault will occur.
Sets the time from when the drive receives data to when the drive sends data.
Enables or disables “request to send” (RTS) control:
0: Disabled (RTS is always on)
1: Enabled (RTS turns on only when sending)
Selects the communication protocol.
0: Memobus (Modbus)
1: N2 (Metasys)
2: FLN (APOGEE)
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 or 1
5 to 65
0 or 1
0 to 2
H5-09
Communication Error
Detection Time
CE Detect Time
Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated. Works in conjunction with parameters H5-05 and H5-04.
0 to 10.0
(H5-08=0)
0 to 10.0
(H5-08=1)
0 to 90.0
(H5-08=2)
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
* After these parameters are changed, drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect.
# Hex, see page A-30.
Factory
Setting
0.0%
0
0
1F #
3
0
3
1
5ms
1
0
2.0sec
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 18
Parameter
No.
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Motor Overload Protection
Selection
MOL Fault Select
Motor Overload Protection
Time
MOL Time Const
Motor Overheat Alarm Operation
Selection
Mtr OH Alarm Sel
Motor Overheat Fault Operation
Selection
Mtr OH Fault Sel
Motor Temperature Input Filter
Time
Mtr Temp Filter
Momentary Power Loss Detection
Selection
PwrL Selection
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Time
PwrL Ridethru t
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
Momentary Power Loss Voltage
Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
Undervoltage Detection
Level
PUV Det Level
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Description
Motor Overload
Enables or disables the motor thermal overload protection.
0: Disabled
1: Std Fan Cooled (Enabled)
2: Std Blower Cooled
3: Vector Motor
Determines how much time will elapse prior to a motor overload fault (OL1), when motor amps exceed the value set in parameter E2-01 by 10%. Actual (OL1) trip time will vary depending on severity of overload.
Operation selection when the motor temperature analog input (H3-09=E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (1.17V)
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
Stopping method when the motor temperature analog input (H3-09=E) exceeds the OH4 level (2.34V).
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
Delay Time applied to motor temperature analog input
(H3-09=E) for filtering purposes.
PwrLoss Ridethru
Enables and disables the momentary power loss function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV1) fault when power is lost.
1: PwrL Ride Thru t - Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L2-02.*
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior to internal power supply shut down.*
* In order for a restart to occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period.
Determines the power loss ride-thru time. This value is dependent on the capacity of the drive. Only effective when L2-01 = 1.
Used to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before the drive output turns back on. After a power loss, if L2-
03 is greater than L2-02, operation resumes after the time set in L2-03.
The time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/f pattern after speed search (current detection mode) is complete.
Sets the drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the factory setting, additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary.
Setting
Range
0 to 1
0.1 to 20.0
0 to 3
0 to 2
0.00 to
10.00
0 to 2
0.0 to
25.5sec
0.1 to 5.0sec
0.0 to 5.0sec
Voltage
Class
Dependent
Factory
Setting
1
8.0min
3
1
0.20sec
2 kVA
Dependent kVA
Dependent kVA
Dependent
Voltage
Class
Dependent
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 19
Parameter
No.
L3-01
L3-02
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Stall Prevention Selection During
Accel
StallP Accel Sel
Stall Prevention Level During
Accel
StallP Accel Lvl
Stall Prevention Selection During
Decel
StallP Decel Sel
Stall Prevention Selection During
Run
StallP Run Sel
Stall Prevention Level During
Running
StallP Run Level
Description
Stall Prevention
0: Disabled (Motor accelerates at active acceleration,
C1-01 or C1-03. The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short).
1: General Purpose (When output current exceeds L3-
02 level, acceleration stops. It starts to accelerate at current value recovery).
2: Intelligent (The active acceleration rate, C1-01 or
C1-02, is ignored. Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time w/o exceeding the current value set in L3-02).
This function is enabled when L3-01 is “1” or “2”.
Drive rated current is 100%. Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting.
0: Disabled (The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, C1-02 or C1-04. If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an OV fault may occur).
1: General Purpose (The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, C1-02 or C1-04, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the output frequency will clamp. Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent (The active deceleration rate is ignored and the drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level).
0: Disabled (Drive runs a set frequency). A heavy load may cause the drive to trip on an OC fault.
1: Decel Time 1 (In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading, the drive will start to decelerate at Decel time 1 (C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-06. Once the current level drops below the
L3-06 level the drive will accelerate back to its set frequency at the active acceleration rate).
2: Decel Time 2 (Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
For 6Hz or less frequency, stall prevention function during run is disabled regardless of L3-05 set.
This function is enabled when L3-05 is “1” or “2”.
Drive rated current is set as 100%.
Normally, changing the setting is not required.
Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory setting.
Setting
Range
0 to 2
0 to 200
0 to 3
0 to 2
30 to 200
Factory
Setting
1
120%
1
1
120%
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 20
Parameter
No.
L4-01
L4-02
L4-05
L4-06
L5-01
L5-02
L5-03
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Speed Agreement Detection Level
Spd Agree Level
Speed Agreement Detection Width
Spd Agree Width
Frequency Reference Loss
Detection Selection
Ref Loss Sel
Frequency Reference Level at
Loss Frequency
Fref at Floss
Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Num of Restarts
Auto Restart Operation Selection
Restart Sel
Maximum Restart Time After
Fault
Max Restart Time
Torque Detection Selection 1
Load Detection
Torque Detection Level 1
Load Det Lvl
Torque Detection Time 1
Loss Det Time
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Description
Ref Detection
L4-01 and L4-02 are used in conjunction with the multi-function outputs, (H2-01and H2-02) as a setpoint and hysteresis for a contact closure.
Determines how the drive will react when the frequency reference is lost.
0: Stop (Disabled) - Drive will not run at the frequency reference
1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef - Drive will run at a percentage (L4-06) of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost.
If Frequency Reference loss function is enabled
(L4-05=1) and Frequency Reference is lost, then the drive will run at reduced frequency reference determined by L4-06. New Fref =Fref at time of loss x L4-06.
Fault Restart
Determines the number of times the drive will perform an automatic restart.
Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt.
0: No Flt Relay - fault contact will not activate during an automatic restart.
1: Flt Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an automatic restart.
If the restart fails (or is not attempted due to a continuing fault condition, e.g. an OV fault) the Drive waits L5-03 seconds before attempting another restart.
Torque Detection
Determines the drive's response to an overtorque / undertorque condition. Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and
L6-03.
0: Disabled
1: OL@SpdAgree - Alm (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection).
2: OL At RUN - Alm (Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection)
3: OL@SpdAgree - Flt (Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
4: OL At RUN - Flt (Overtorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault.)
5: LL@SpdAgree - Alm (Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
6: LL at RUN - Alm (Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection)
7: LL @ SpdAgree - Flt (Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
8: LL At RUN - Flt (Undertorque Detection is always active and drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault).
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current.
Sets the length of time an overtorque / undertorque condition must exist before being recognized by the drive. OL3 is then displayed.
Setting
Range
0.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 20.0
0 or 1
0 to 100.0%
0 to 10
0 or 1
0.5 to 600.0
0 to 8
0 to 300
0.0 to 10.0
Factory
Setting
0.0Hz
2.0Hz
1
80.0%
0
0
180.0sec
0
15%
10.0sec
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Quick Setting
Programming
Quick Setting
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 21
Parameter
No.
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-06
L8-09
L8-10
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
L8-18
L8-19
L8-32
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Internal Dynamic Braking
Resistor Protection Selection
DB Resistor Prot
Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation
Selection
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Ph Loss In Lvl
Output Ground Fault Detection
Selection
Ground Fault Sel
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Selection
Fan On/Off Sel
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Delay Time
Fan Delay Time
Ambient Temperature Setting
Ambient Temp
OL2 Characteristic Selection at
Low Speeds
OL2 Sel @ L-Spd
Soft CLA Selection
Soft CLA Sel
OH Frequency Reference
Reduction Level
Fref During OH
OH1 Detection Selection for Fan
Failure
OH1 Detect Sel
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Description
Hdwe Protection
0: Not Provided
1: Provided
When the cooling fan temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an overheat pre-alarm (OH) will occur.
Drive Operation upon OH Pre Alarm Detection.
0: Ramp to Stop (Decel Time C1-02).
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop (Decel Time = C1-09).
3: Alarm Only
*0 to 2 is recognized as fault detection, and 3 is recognized as alarm. (For the fault detection, the fault contact operates.)
4: OH Alarm & Reduce (Continue operation and reduce output frequency by L8-19).
Monitors the DC Bus current ripple and activates when one of the input phases is lost (PF).
Enables and disables drive output ground fault detection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Controls the Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation.
0: Fan On-Run Mode (Fan will operate only when drive is running and for L8-11 seconds after RUN is removed).
1: Fan Always On (Cooling fan operates whenever drive is powered up).
When L8-10=0 this parameter sets a delay time for
Cooling Fan de-energization after the run command is removed.
When the drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating, drive overload (OL2) protection level is reduced.
This parameter assists in protecting the output transistor junctions from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (L8-18 is active)
Enables and disables software Current Limit “A” (CLA)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the amount of frequency reference reduction when an Overheat Pre-alarm (OH) is detected.
Selects the drive response upon failure of the internal cooling fan.
0: Disabled
FAN alarm is displayed
1: Enabled
OH1 fault occurs
Setting
Range
0 or 1
50 to 130
0 to 4
0.0 to 25.0
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 300
45 to 60°C
0 or 1
0 or 1
0.0
to
100.0
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
0
Menu
Location kVA
Dependent
Programming
4 Programming kVA
Dependent
Programming
1
0
300sec
45°C
1
1
20.0%
1
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 22
Parameter
No.
n1-01 n1-02 n3-01 n3-02 n3-03 n3-04 o1-01 t o1-02 o1-03
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Hunting Prevention Selection
Hunt Prev Select
Hunting Prevention Gain Setting
Hunt Prev Gain
High-Slip Braking Deceleration
Frequency Width
HSB Decel Width
High-Slip Braking Current Limit
HSB Current Ref
High-Slip Braking Dwell Time at
Stop
HSB DwelTim@ Stp
High-Slip Braking Overload Time
HSB OL Time
User Monitor Selection
User Monitor Sel
User Monitor Selection After
Power-Up
Power-On Monitor
Digital Operator Display Selection
Display Scaling
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Description
Hunting Prev
0: Disabled (Hunting prevention function disabled).
1: Enabled (Hunting prevention function enabled).
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration. There is a loss of responsiveness if hunting prevention is enabled.
Gain setting for the Hunting Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01=1, increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
If the motor stalls while n1-01=1 decrease the gain by
0.1 until the stalling ceases.
High Slip
Sets how aggressively the drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor. If overvoltage (OV) faults occur during HSB, this parameter may need to be increased.
Sets the maximum current to be drawn during a HSB stop. Higher n3-02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current, and therefore increased motor heating.
Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1-09
(Minimum Frequency). If this time is set too low, the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off.
Sets the time required for a HSB Overload Fault to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during a HSB stop. Normally this does not need to be adjusted.
Monitor Select
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up when o1-02 = 4.
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up.
1: Frequency Ref
2: Output Freq
3: Output Current
4: User Monitor (set by o1-01)
Sets the units of the Frequency References (d1-01 through d1-17) and the Frequency Reference Monitor
(U1-01).
0: Hz
1: % (100%. = E1-04)
2 to 39: RPM. (Enter the number of motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User display
Desired set/display value is set at Max. output frequency.
4 digit number.
The number of digits from the right the decimal point is displayed.
Example: If “200.0 is displayed at Max. output frequency, set “12000”.
When o1-03
≥40 (user units), the unit selected in o1-09 will be displayed for D1-01 to D1-17, U1-01, U1-02, and U1-20
Setting
Range
0 or 1
0.00 to 2.50
1 to 20
100 to 200
0.0 to 10.0
30 to 1200
6 to 53
1 to 4
0 to 39999 o1-05
LCD Brightness Adjustment
LCD Contrast
Set Value
5
Description
LCD display becomes dark
3
1
Standard setting
LCD display becomes light
0 to 5
Factory
Setting
1
1.00
5%
150%
1.0sec
40sec
6
1**
0
3
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
** Factory setting changes to “2” when b5-01=1
Parameters A - 23
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description o1-06 o1-07 o1-08 o1-09
User Monitor Selection Mode
Monitor Mode Sel
Second Line User Monitor
Selection
2nd Monitor Sel
Third Line User Monitor
Selection
3rd Monitor Sel
Frequency Reference Display
Units
Frq Display Unit
Selects the "U1" monitors displayed on the 4th and 5th lines of the digital operator display.
0: 3 Mon Sequential (Displays the next 2 sequential U1 monitors).
1: 3 Mon Selectable (Displays U1 monitors set by o1-
07 and o1-08).
Sets the "U1" monitor always displayed on the 4th line of the digital operator display. Effective only when o1-06 = 1.
Sets the "U1" monitor always displayed on the 5th line of the digital operator display. Effective only when o1-06 = 1.
Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters and frequency related monitors when o1-03
≥40.
0: WC:InchOfWater
1: PSI:lb/SqrInch
2: GPM:Gallons/Min
3: F:DegFahrenheit
4: CFM:Cubic ft/Min
5: CMH:Cubic M/Hr
6: LPH:Liters/Hr
7: LPS:Liters/Sec
8: Bar:Bar
9: Pa:Pascals
10: C:DegCelsius
11: Mtr:Meters
Key Selections
o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04
Local/Remote Key Function
Selection
Local/Remote Key
OFF Key Function During Auto
Run
Oper OFF Key
User Parameter Default Value
User Defaults
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
Determines the status of the Local/Remote key, if present.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Has no function when H/O/A operator is connected.
Determines if the off key on the digital operator will stop the drive when drive is operating from external terminals or serial communications.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Allows storing of current parameter values as a User
Initialization Selection at parameter A1-03.
0: No Change (No user parameter set active).
1: Set Defaults (Saves current parameter settings as user initialization. A1-03 now allows selecting <1110> for user initialization.
2: Clear All (Clears the currently saved user initialization. A1-03 no longer allows selecting
<1110>.
Sets the kVA of the drive. Enter the number based on drive Model #. Use the
CIMR-E7
portion of the
Model Number.
Reference Appendix B o2-05 o2-06
Frequency Reference Setting
Method Selection
Operator M.O.P.
Operation Selection when Digital
Operator is Disconnected
Oper Detection
Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator.
0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
1: Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the digital operator without having to press the data/enter key.
Determines if the drive will fault when the digital operator is removed.
0: Disabled - The drive will not fault when the digital operator is removed.
1: Enabled - The drive will fault (OPR) and coast to stop when the operator is removed.
o2-07
Cumulative Operation Time
Setting
Elapsed Time Set
Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer.
Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
** Factory settings change when b5-01=1 as follows: o1-06=1, o1-07=38, o1-08=24.
Setting
Range
0 or 1
1 to 53
1 to 53
0 to 11
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 to FF
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 65535
Factory
Setting
0**
2**
3**
0
1
1
0
Menu
Location kVA
Dependent
Programming
1
1
0 hours
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Parameters A - 24
Parameter
No.
o2-08 o2-09
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Cumulative Operation Time
Selection
Elapsed Time Run
Initialization Specification
Selection
Init Mode Sel
Table A.1
Parameter List (Continued
)
Description
Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed timer
(o2-07).
0: Power-On Time
(Time accumulates whenever drive is powered)
1: Running Time
(Time accumulates only when drive is running)
Determines parameter values after a drive initialization
(A1-03) is executed. This should always be set to "1"
American Spec.
1: American spec
WARNING
Parameter o2-09 should always be set to “1: American
Spec.” (Do not set.) This parameter does not normally require adjustment. Possible damage to equipment or injury may occur if this setting is changed from “1:
American Spec.” o2-09 is a macro parameter that can change the default values of terminal I/O and many other parameters in the drive. Consult the Yaskawa factory for details.
This parameter is not available in software versions >
4010.
o2-10 o2-12
Cumulative Cooling Fan
Operation Time Setting
Fan ON Time Set
Fault Trace/Fault History Clear
Function
FLT Trace Init
o2-14 o2-15 o3-01 o3-02
T1-02
T1-04 kWh User Monitor (U1-29)
Initialization
kWh MonitorClear
Hand Key Function Selection
Oper Hand Key
Copy Function Selection
Copy Function Sel
Read Allowed Selection
Read Allowable
Motor Rated Power
Mtr Rated Power
Motor Rated Current
Rated Current
Setting
Range
0 or 1
1
Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time.
Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3 monitors.
0: Disabled (no effect)
1: Enabled - resets U2 and U3 monitors, and returns o2-12 to zero
Used to reset the kilowatt Hour monitor to zero
0: Disabled (no change)
1: Clear all - Resets U1-29 to zero and returns o2-14 to zero.
Enables or disables the "Hand" key on the digital operator.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
COPY Function
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the digital operator.
0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV -> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the drive to the digital operator.
2: OP -> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the digital operator into the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY - Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the digital operator.
NOTE: When using the copy function, the drive model number and software number (U1-14) must match or an error will occur.
Enables and disables all digital operator copy functions.
0: Disabled - No digital operator copy functions are allowed
1: Enabled - Copying allowed
Auto-Tuning
Sets the motor rated power in kW.
Sets the motor rated current.
(Used only during an auto-tune).
0 to 65535
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 to 1
0.00 to
650.00
kVA
Dependent
Factory
Setting
1
1
0 hours
0
0
1
0
0
Menu
Location
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming kVA
Dependent kVA
Dependent
Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning
Parameters A - 25
Monitor List
Parameter
No.
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-06
U1-07
U1-08
U1-10
Table A.2 Monitor List
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Frequency Reference
Frequency Ref
Output Frequency
Output Freq
Output Current
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Output Power
Output kWatts
Description
Monitor
Frequency reference (speed command) monitor when in auto mode, frequency reference (speed command) setting location when in hand mode. Units changeable via o1-03.
Output frequency (speed) monitor. Units changeable via o1-03.
Output current monitor
Displays Drive output voltage
Displays DC Bus Voltage
Input Terminal Status
Input Term Sts
Displays Drive output power
Displays Drive input terminal status
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: FWD. run
(Terminal S1) is ON
1: REV. run
(Terminal S2) is ON
1: Multi-function input 1
(Terminal S3) is ON
1: Multi-function input 2
(Terminal S4) is ON
1: Multi-function input 3
(Terminal S5) is ON
1: Multi-function input 4
(Terminal S6) is ON
U1-11
Output Terminal Status
Output Term Sts
Output terminal ON/OFF Check
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: Multi-function Contact 1 output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function Contact 2 output 1 (Terminal M3-M4) is ON
Not used
1: Fault output
(Terminal MA/MB) is ON
U1-12
Drive Operation Status
Int Ctl Sts 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: During running
1: During zero speed
1: During reverse
1: During reset signal input
1: During speed agree
1: Drive operation ready
1: During fault detection
(Minor fault)
1: During fault detection
(Major fault)
Parameters A - 26
Table A.2 Monitor List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
U1-13
U1-14
U1-15
U1-16
U1-18
U1-20
U1-24
U1-28
U1-29
U1-30
U1-34
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Monitor
Cumulative Operation Time
Elapsed Time
Software Number
FLASH ID
Terminal A1 Input Voltage
Term A1 Level
Terminal A2 Input Voltage
Term A2 level
Motor Secondary Current (I q
)
Mot SEC Current
Output Frequency After Soft Start
SFS Output
PI Feedback Value
PI Feedback
CPU Number
CPU ID
kWh
kWh Lo 4 Digits
MWh
kWh Hi 5 Digits
First Parameter Causing an OPE
OPE Detected
PI Input
PI Input
PI Output
PI Output
PI Setpoint
PI Setpoint
Displays total operating or power-on time of the Drive.
Displays Drive's software number.
Displays the input voltage on Terminal A1, as a percentage of
10V DC.
Displays the input current (or voltage) on Terminal A2, as a percentage of 20mA (or 10 V DC).
Displays the amount of current being used by the motor to produce torque (Iq).
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) after the accel and decel ramps. (units changeable via o1-03)
Displays the feedback signal when PI control is used.*
Displays control board hardware revision.
Displays the accumulated kWh.
Displays the accumulated MWh.
Displays the parameter number causing an "OPE" fault.
Displays the "error" in the PI regulator. (U1-36 = PI Setpoint -
PI Feedback).
Displays the output of the PI as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
Displays the setpoint of the PI regulator (U1-38 = PI reference
+ PI bias).*
U1-39
Memobus Communication Error
Code
Transmit Err
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used. Always 0.
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Fleming error
1: Timeover
Not used. Always 0 .
U1-40
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Time
FAN Elapsed Time
Displays total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan.
U1-51
U1-52
Auto Mode Frequency Reference
Value
AUTO Mode Fref
Hand Mode Frequency Reference
Value
HAND Mode Fref
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) when in auto mode.
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) when in hand mode, or displays Terminal A2 when differential mode is selected.
U1-53
PI Feedback 2 Value
PI Feedback 2
Displays PI feedback 2 value.
** Units depend on b5-31 setting; scaling is set by b5-20
Parameters A - 27
Fault Trace List
Table A.3 Fault Trace List
Fault Trace
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
U2-04
U2-05
U2-07
U2-08
U2-09
U2-11
U2-12
Current Fault
Current Fault
Previous Fault
Last Fault
Frequency Reference at Most Recent Fault
Frequency Ref
Output Frequency at Most Recent Fault
Output Freq
Output Current at Most Recent Fault
Output Current
Output Voltage at Most Recent Fault
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage at Most Recent Fault
DC Bus Voltage
Output Power at Most Recent Fault
Output kWatts
Input Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as for U1-10.
Input Term Sts
Output Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as for U1-11.
Output Term Sts
U2-13
Drive Operation Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as for U1-12.
Inverter Status
U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault
Elapsed time
(Note) Fault trace is not executed at CPF00, CPF
0
1, CPF03, UVI and UV2.
Parameters A - 28
Fault History List
Table A.4 Fault History List
Fault History
U3-01
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
U3-06
U3-07
U3-08
U3-09
U3-10
U3-11
U3-12
U3-13
U3-14
U3-15
Most Recent Fault
Last Fault
2 nd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 2
3 rd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 3
4 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 4
Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 1
Cumulative Operation Time at 2 nd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 2
Cumulative Operation Time at 3 rd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 3
Cumulative Operation Time at 4 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 4
5 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 5
6 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 6
7 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 7
8 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 8
9 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 9
10 th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 10
Cumulative Operation Time at 5 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 5
U3-16
U3-17
U3-18
U3-19
Cumulative Operation Time at 6 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 6
Cumulative Operation Time at 7 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 7
Cumulative Operation Time at 8 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 8
Cumulative Operation Time at 9 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 9
U3-20
Cumulative Operation Time at 10 th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 10
(Note) Faults such as CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV02 are not stored in fault history.
Parameters A - 29
Decimal to Hex Conversion:
Decimal
45
46
47
48
41
42
43
44
49
50
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Hex
2D
2E
2F
30
29
2A
2B
2C
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
1D
1E
1F
20
19
1A
1B
1C
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
D
E
F
10
9
A
B
C
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Decimal
95
96
97
98
91
92
93
94
99
100
87
88
89
90
83
84
85
86
79
80
81
82
75
76
77
78
71
72
73
74
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
55
56
57
58
51
52
53
54
Hex
5F
60
61
62
5B
5C
5D
5E
63
64
57
58
59
5A
53
54
55
56
4F
50
51
52
4B
4C
4D
4E
47
48
49
4A
43
44
45
46
3F
40
41
42
3B
3C
3D
3E
37
38
39
3A
33
34
35
36
Parameters A - 30
Appendix B
Capacity Related Parameters
This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of o2-04.
Drive Capacity............................................................................ B-2
Capacity Related Parameters B - 1
Drive Capacity
Parameter o2-04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number. Parameter o2-04 will need to be adjusted when replacing a control board.
If a Control PCB is changed, the first time the Drive is powered up, parameter o2-04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B.1 for the Drive model number. After properly setting parameter 02-04, a 2-wire or 3-wire initialization must be performed by setting parameter A1-03=2220 or A1-03=3330, respectively. This will automatically program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B.2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating.
Voltage
208-240VAC
208-230VAC
480VAC
Table B.1 Drive Capacity Selection
Model Number
CIMR-E7U20P4
CIMR-E7U20P7
CIMR-E7U21P5
CIMR-E7U22P2
CIMR-E7U23P7
CIMR-E7U25P5
CIMR-E7U27P5
CIMR-E7U2011
CIMR-E7U2015
CIMR-E7U2018
CIMR-E7U2022
CIMR-E7U2030
CIMR-E7U2037
CIMR-E7U2045
CIMR-E7U2055
CIMR-E7U2075
CIMR-E7U2090
CIMR-E7U2110
CIMR-E7U40P4
CIMR-E7U40P7
CIMR-E7U41P5
CIMR-E7U42P2
CIMR-E7U43P7
CIMR-E7U45P5
CIMR-E7U47P5
CIMR-E7U49P0
CIMR-E7U4011
CIMR-E7U4015
CIMR-E7U4018
CIMR-E7U4024
CIMR-E7U4030
CIMR-E7U4037
CIMR-E7U4045
CIMR-E7U4055
CIMR-E7U4075
CIMR-E7U4090
CIMR-E7U4110
CIMR-E7U4160
CIMR-E7U4185
CIMR-E7U4220
CIMR-E7U4300
2A
3D
2C
2D
27
3C
28
29
22
23
24
26
10
11
20
21
32
34
35
36
2E
2F
30
31
37 o2-04 Setting
0
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
E
F
C
D
A
B
8
9
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
125
150
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
Nominal Hp
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
75/100
75
100
125
150
200
250
300/350
400/450
500+
.
Capacity Related Parameters B - 2
Parameters Affected by o2-04
The factory setting of the following parameters may change when the Drive capacity is changed.
Table B.2 Parameters Affected by o2-04
Parameter Number
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
E2-03
E2-05
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
L8-06 o2-04
Energy Saving Coefficient Value
Energy Save COEF
Carrier Frequency Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Motor No Load Current
No-Load Current
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
Term Resistance
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time
PwrL Ridethru t
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Ph Loss In Lvl
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
Capacity Related Parameters B - 3
Capacity Related Parameter Values
The following tables detail the factory default settings for the parameters that are affected by the setting of parameter o2-04.
Table B.3 208/240VAC Drives
Drive Model
CIMR-_
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
_ _
Nominal
Hp
0.5/0.75
2
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
75/100
Factory
Default for b8-04
Factory
Default for
C6-02
Factory
Default for
E2-01
Factory
Default for
E2-03
Factory
Default for
E2-05
288.2
223.7
169.4
156.8
122.9
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
10kHz
10kHz
10kHz
8kHz
10kHz
15kHz
15kHz
8kHz
10kHz
10kHz
10kHz
10kHz
5kHz
5kHz
8kHz
2kHz
1.9
3.3
6.2
8.5
14.0
19.6
26.6
39.7
53.0
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
15.2
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
2090
2110
125
150
20.65
18.12
2kHz
2kHz
260.0
260.0
Note: b8-04 = Energy Savings Coefficient
C6-02 = Carrier Frequency
E2-01 = Motor Rated Current
E2-03 = Motor No-Load Current
E2-05 = Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
L2-02 = Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
L2-03 = Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
L2-04 = Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
L8-02 = Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
L8-06 = Input Phase Loss Detection Level
72.0
72.0
4.5
5.1
8.0
11.2
1.2
1.8
2.8
3.0
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
Factory
Default for
L2-02
Factory
Default for
L2-03
Factory
Default for
L2-04
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.5
1.7
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Factory
Default for
L8-02
Factory
Default for
L8-06
90
°
C
100
°
C
90
°
C
90
°
C
95
°
C
100
°
C
105
°
C
110
°
C
100
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
100
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
18
20
17
16
17
15
24
20
18
20
12
10
17
21
5
7.5
10
12
Capacity Related Parameters B - 4
Table B.4 480VAC Drives
Drive Model
CIMR-_
4011
4015
4018
4024
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
49P0
_ _
Nominal
Hp
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
Factory
Default for b8-04
Factory
Default for
C6-02
Factory
Default for
E2-01
Factory
Default for
E2-03
Factory
Default for
E2-05
Factory
Default for
L2-02
Factory
Default for
L2-03
Factory
Default for
L2-04
Factory
Default for
L8-02
Factory
Default for
L8-06
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
245.80
189.50
145.38
145.46
140.88
126.26
115.74
89.08
92.54
76.32
71.56
67.20
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
15kHz
8kHz
10kHz
10kHz
10kHz
8kHz
8kHz
8kHz
5kHz
4075
4090
4110
4160
125
150
200
250
46.20
38.91
36.23
30.13
5kHz
8kHz
5kHz
5kHz
130.0
156.0
190.0
270.0
4185
4220
300/350
400/450
30.57
27.13
2kHz
2kHz
310.0
370.0
4300 500+ 21.76
2kHz 500.0
Note: b8-04 = Energy Savings Coefficient
C6-02 = Carrier Frequency
E2-01 = Motor Rated Current
E2-03 = Motor No-Load Current
E2-05 = Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
L2-02 = Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
L2-03 = Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
L2-04 = Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
L8-02 = Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
L8-06 = Input Phase Loss Detection Level
26.5
32.9
52.3
52.0
65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
7.0
13.3
19.9
21.0
1.0
1.6
3.1
4.2
10.9
19.1
22.0
24.0
5.6
7.6
7.8
8.6
36.0
40.0
49.0
70.0
2.3
2.6
4.0
5.6
0.6
0.8
1.4
1.5
81.0
96.0
130.0
38.198
22.459
10.100
6.495
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.922
0.550
0.403
0.269
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.014
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.8
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
20
20
20
20
23
17
17
20
12
10
20
23
5
7.5
10
10
15
15
15
16
16
16
14
95
°
C
95
°
C
98
°
C
85
°
C
85
°
C
85
°
C
90
°
C
90
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
90
°
C
95
°
C
95
°
C
90
°
C
95
°
C
98
°
C
108
°
C
100
°
C
108
°
C
95
°
C
100
°
C
95
°
C
Capacity Related Parameters B - 5
Notes:
Capacity Related Parameters B - 6
Appendix C
Specifications
This appendix details the standard Drive Specifications.
Standard Drive Specifications................................................... C-2
Specifications C - 1
Standard Drive Specifications
The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables.
208-240VAC
Model Number CIMR-E7U
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Motor HP
208V
230V
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Table C.1 208-240VAC Drive Specifications
20P4
1.4
0.5/0.75
0.5/0.75
3.6
20P7
1.8
1
1
4.6
21P5
3.0
22P2
4.1
23P7
6.4
25P5
8.8
27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022
12.0
18.0
23.0
29.0
34.0
1.5/2
1.5/2
3
3
5
5
7.5
7.5
7.8
10.8
16.8
23.0
31.0
46.2
59.4
74.8
88.0
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240VAC (Proportional to input voltage)
120 Hz
10
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
30
30
4.3
5.5
9.4
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240VAC, 50/60 Hz
13 20 24
±5%
37
+ 10%, - 15%
53 70 89 98
2030
44.0
40
40
115.0
120
DC Reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-Pulse
Rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built-in
Possible
Note: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
A phase-shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
Model Number CIMR-E7U
Rated output capacity (kVA)
208V
Motor HP
230V
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Table C.1 208-230VAC Drive Specifications (Continued)
2037
62.0
50
50/60
162.0
2045
73.0
60
75
192.0
2055 2075
82
75
120.0
100
-
215
100/125
312.0
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240VAC
(Proportional to input voltage)
120 Hz
2090
140.0
125
-
360.0
180 212
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240VAC, 50/60 Hz
237 350
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
396
2110
160.0
150
150
415.0
457
DC Reactor Built-in
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-Pulse
Rectification
Possible
Note: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
A phase-shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
Specifications C - 2
480VAC
Model Number CIMR-E7U
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Motor HP (460V)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
40P4
1.4
0.5/0.75
1.8
Table C.1 480VAC Drive Specifications
40P7
1.6
1
2.1
41P5
2.8
42P2
4.0
43P7
5.8
45P5
9.5
47P5
13.0
49P0
16.0
4011
21.0
1.5/2 3 5 7.5
10 15 20
3.7
5.3
7.6
12.5
17.0
21.0
27.0
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
120 Hz
4015
26.0
25
34.0
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480VAC, 50/60 Hz
4018
30.0
30
40.0
2.2
2.5
4.4
6.4
9.0
15 20 26 33 40 48
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
±5%
DC Reactor
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-pulse
Rectification
Optional
Not possible
Model Number CIMR-E7U
Rated output capacity (kVA)
Motor HP (460V)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency (Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Table C.1 480VAC Drive Specifications (Continued)
4024 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4160 4185 4220 4300
40.0
51.0
59.0
73.0
95.0
120.0
140.0
180.0
230.0
315.0
390.0
510.0
40
52.0
50
67.2
60
77.0
75
96.0
100
125.0
125
156.0
150
180.0
200
240.0
250
304.0
300/350 400/450
414.0
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480VAC (Proportional to input voltage)
515.0
500+
675.0
120 Hz
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480VAC, 50/60 Hz
57 74 85 106 134 334 456 567 743 172 198
+ 10%, - 15%
264
±5%
DC Reactor Built-in
Measures for power supply harmonics
12-Pulse
Rectification
Possible
Note: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated output current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
A 3-wire phase-shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
Specifications C - 3
Model Number
CIMR-E7U
Control method
Speed range
Speed control accuracy
Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Table C.1 Common E7 Drive Specifications
Specification
Sine wave PWM
V/f control
40:1
±2 to 3% (77
°
F ± 50
°
F) (25
°
C ± 10
°
C)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (14
°
F to 104
°
F) (-10
°
C to +40
°
C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (77
°
F ± 50
°
F) (25
°
C ±10
°
C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (10 bit with sign)
Frequency setting signal
(Speed Command)
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Main control functions
Motor protection
Fuse blown protection
Overload capacity and maximum current
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Momentary power loss ridethru
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
.
Enclosure Type
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Approval Agencies
0-10 Vdc, 4-20 mA
0.0 to 6000.0 s (2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Restarting for momentary power loss, bi-directional speed search, overtorque detection, 5 preset speeds,
acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire sequence, auto-tuning, cooling fan ON/OFF control, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PI control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, Modbus communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and copy function
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay
Stops for fuse blown
110% of rated output current for 60 seconds
208-240Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V
480Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V
208-240Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V
480Vac: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V
Power Interruptions of 15 ms or more
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s
Protection by thermistor
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running
Protection by electronic circuits. (50% of inverter rated current)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 Vdc or more
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2030 and 40P4 thru 4055
Open chassis type (IP00): CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
14
°
F to 104
°
F (-10
°
C to 40
°
C) NEMA 1 type
14
°
F to 113
°
F (–10
°
C to 45
°
C) Open chassis type
95% max. (with no condensation)
-4
°
F to 140
°
F (- 20
°
C to + 60
°
C) short-term temperature during transportation
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
3300 ft. (1000 m), higher altitudes by derate
10 to 20 Hz, 32 ft/sec
2
(9.8 m/s
2
) max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 6.5 ft/sec
2
(2 m/s
2
) max.
UL File E143427
Specifications C - 4
Appendix D
Communication
This appendix details the specifications, connections, and programming of the Drive for Modbus communications. This Drive also contains embedded
APOGEE
™ FLN
and
Metasys
®
communication protocols. For details regarding
APOGEE
™ FLN
,
please refer to the E7
APOGEE
™ FLN
Technical Manual (TM.E7.21). For details regarding
Metasys
®
, please refer to the Technical Manual (TM.E7.22). These two documents can be found on the CD-ROM included with this Drive or at www.drives.com.
Using Modbus Communication ................................................. D-2
Modbus Function Code Details................................................. D-7
Modbus Data Tables................................................................. D-9
Modbus Self-Diagnosis ........................................................... D-14
Communications D - 1
Using Modbus Communication
Serial communication can be performed with Direct Digital Controllers (DDCs) or similar devices using the Modbus protocol.
Modbus Communication Configuration
Modbus communication is configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves.
The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time. Consequently, the slave address of each slave must be initially set, so that the master can perform serial communication using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions, and send a response back to the master.
Master
E7
Slaves
E7 E7
Fig D.1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive
Communication Specifications
The Modbus communication specifications are shown below:
Interface
Item
Communications Cycle
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Table D.1 Modbus Communication Specifications
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps.
Number of Connectable Units
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit selected
Modbus
31 units max.
Communications D - 2
Communication Connection Terminal
Modbus communication uses the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain. Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch
S1.
RS-422A or RS-485
Switch
O
F
F
S1
1
1
2
Terminating resistance
DIP Switch S1-1 located on terminal board.
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig D.2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistance
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cable, and use proper shield clamps.
3. When using RS-485 communication, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the control circuit terminal board. See Fig
D-3 below.
4. Shield at one end only.
Fig D.3 RS-485 Communication Connection
Procedure for Setting Up Communication
Use the following procedure to perform communication with the DDC.
1.
Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Drive.
2.
Turn ON the input power to the Drive.
3.
Set the required communication parameters (H5-01 to H5-09) using the Digital Operator.
4.
Turn OFF the input to the Drive power, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5.
Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again.
6.
Perform communication with the DDC.
Communications D - 3
Related Parameters
Table D.2 Serial Communication Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description b1-01 b1-02
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Drive Node Address
Serial Comm Adr
Communication Speed Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Communication Parity Selection
Serial Com Sel
Stopping Method after
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Communication Error Detection
Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
Selects the speed command (frequency reference) input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1
(or Terminal A2 see parameter H3-13)
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - "Hand" and "Off" keys on digital operator
1: Terminal - Contact Closure on Terminal S1
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
Selects drive station node number (address) for terminals R+, R-, S+, S-.*
Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications.
Selects the baud rate for terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-*.
0: 1200 Baud
1: 2400 Baud
2: 4800 Baud
3: 9600 Baud
4: 19200 Baud
Selects the communication parity for terminals R+,
R-, S+ and S-.*
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
Selects the stopping method when a communication error is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
4: Run at D1-04 - available when H5-08 = “1:N2
METASYS” OR “2:FLN APOGEE”
Enables or disables the communications timeout detection function.
0: Disabled - A communications loss will NOT cause a communications fault.
1: Enabled - If communications is lost for more than the time specified in parameter H5-09, a communications fault will occur.
Sets the time from when the drive receives data to when the drive sends data.
H5-07
H5-08
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Communication Protocol
Selection
Protocol Select
Enables or disables request to send (RTS) control:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Selects the communication protocol.
0: Modbus
1: N2 (Metasys)
2: FLN (APOGEE)
H5-09
Communication Error
Detection Time
CE Detect Time
Determines how long communications must be lost before a fault is annunciated. Works in conjunction with parameters H5-05 and H5-04.
* After these parameters are changed drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect.
Setting Range
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 20 (Modbus)
0 to FF (N2)
0 to 63 (P1)
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 or 1
5 to 65
0 or 1
0 to 2
0.0 to 10.0
#
Hex, see page A-30
Factory
Setting
1
1
1F
#
3
0
3
1
5ms
1
0
2.0sec
Chapter
Ref #
Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02:
1.
Monitoring operation status of the Drive
2.
Setting and reading Drive parameters
3.
Resetting faults
4.
Input multi-function commands
Menu
Location
Quick
Setting
Quick
Setting
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
Programming
IMPORTANT
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function command input from the DDC and the command input from multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7.
Communications D - 4
Message Format
In Modbus communication, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below. The length of the data packets is changed by the command
(function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Fig D.4 Message Format
The space between messages must support the following:
DDC to Drive
Command message
Drive to DDC
Response message
DDC to Drive
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 setting
24 bits long
5 ms min.
Fig D.5 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Drive address from 0 to 32. If 0 is selected, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the Drive will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are four function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
03H
06H
08H
10H
Table D.3 Modbus Function Codes
Command Message
Function
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Reading/Holding Register Contents
Write In Single Holding Register
Loopback Test
Write In Several Holding Registers
8
8
8
11
* Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message (error response message is always 5 bytes).
8
41
8
8
Response Message
Min.*
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
8
8
7
8
37
8
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Communications D - 5
Error Check
Errors are detected during communication using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method:
1.
The factory setting for CRC-16 communication is typically zero, but when using the Modbus system, set the factory setting to one (e.g., set all 16 bits to 1).
2.
Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3.
Calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
Communications D - 6
Modbus Function Code Details
Reading/Holding Register Contents (03H)
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities. The addresses must be consecutive, starting from a specified address. The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
02H
03H
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
03H
Data quantity
1st storage register
Higher
Lower
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
08H
00H
65H
00H
00H
00H
00H
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
Fig D.6 Function Code 03H Message Example
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
02H
83H
Error code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
03H
F1H
31H
Write In Single Holding Register (06H)
Command Message
Slave address 01H
Function code
Register
Address
06H
Upper 00H
Lower 01H
Setting
Data
Upper 00H
Lower 03H
Upper 98H
CRC-16
Lower 0BH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address
Function code
Register
Address
Setting
Data
01H
06H
Upper 00H
Lower 01H
Upper 00H
Lower 03H
Upper 98H
CRC-16
Lower 0BH
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
80H + Function Code
01H
86H
Error code 21H
Upper 82H
CRC-16
Lower 78H
Fig D.7 Function Code 06H Message Example
Communications D - 7
Loopback Test (08H)
The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. Set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive.
Command Message
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Higher
Lower
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address 01H
Function code
Higher
Test Code
Lower
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
08H
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Fig D.8 Function Code 08H Message Example
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address 01H
Function code
Error Code
89H
01H
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
86H
50H
Write In Several Holding Registers (10H)
Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses. The written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message: Higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command has been set at a speed command of
60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Drive by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Higher
Lower
Quantity
Higher
Lower
No. of data
Lead data
Higher
Lower
Next data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
10H
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
90H
02H
CDH
C1H
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
Fig D.9 Function Code 10H Message Example
IMPORTANT
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle response messages in the same way.
Communications D - 8
Modbus Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. Reference data can be read and written to.
Register No.
0000H
0001H
Reserved
Frequency reference
Table D.4 Reference Data
Contents
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Run Forward
Run Reverse
External fault
Fault reset
1: Run Forward
1: Run Reverse
1: Fault (EFO)
1: Reset command
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
ComNet
ComCtrl
Multi-function digital input command 3
Multi-function digital input command 4
Bit 8
Bit 9
Multi-function digital input command 5
Multi-function digital input command 6
Bit A Multi-function digital input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H
0007H
0008H
PI Setpoint
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V = 726 to 11 V = 726)
→ 10V = 660
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V = 726 to 11 V = 726)
→ 10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
0009H
Bit 0
Bit 1
Digital output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Digital output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not Used
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6
Bit 7
Set fault contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Fault contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Input PI setpoint 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B Not used
000FH
E
F
C
D
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Not used
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Communications D - 9
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
Table D.5 Monitor Data
Contents
Drive status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Drive startup complete 1: Completed 0: Not completed
Fault 1: Fault
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Not used
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Fault details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Drive overload (OL2)
Drive overheat (OH1, OH2)
Not used
Fuse blown (PUF)
PI feedback reference lost (FbL)
External error (EF, EFO)
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Missing output phase (LF)
Modbus communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Bit 4
Bits 5 to F
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Output voltage reference U1-06
Output current U1-03
Output power
Torque reference
U1-08
U1-09
Not used
Not used
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
Data integrity error
Not used
U1-01
U1-02
Communications D - 10
Table D.5 Monitor Data
Register No.
002BH
002CH
003DH
Contents
Sequence input status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function digital input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function digital input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Multi-function digital input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function digital input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function digital input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used Bits 7 to F
Drive status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Operation
Zero speed
1: Operating
1: Zero speed
Frequency agree
Desired frequency agree
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2
Drive startup completed
1: Matched
1: Matched
1: Output frequency
≤ L4-01
1: Output frequency
≥ L4-01
1: Startup completed
Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Baseblock
Frequency reference mode
Run command mode
Overtorque detection
Frequency reference lost
Retrying error
1: Drive output baseblock
1: Not communication 0: Communication
1: Not communication 0: Communication
1: Detected
1: Lost
1: Retrying
Error (including Modbus communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Modbus communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function digital output status
Bit 0 Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
002DH Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3 to F
002EH - 0030H Not used
Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H
0039H
PI feedback level (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
PI input level (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH
003BH
003CH
PI output level (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
Communication error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
CRC error
Invalid data length
Not used
Parity error
003EH
003FH
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F
KVA setting
Control method
Overrun error
Framing error
Time-out
Not used
Note: Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input (errors can be reset while the Drive is operating).
Communications D - 11
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. Broadcast data can be written to.
Table D.6 Broadcast Data
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2 and 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bits 6 to B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Not used
External error 1: Fault (set using H1-01)
Error Fault 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Not used
Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input
Not used.
0002H Frequency reference 30000/100%
Note: Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
Enter Command
When writing parameters to the Drive from the PLC using Modbus communication, the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, use the Enter command.
There are two types of Enter commands:
1. Enter commands that enable parameter data in RAM
2. Enter commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the Enter command data. Enter command data can only be written.
The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No.
0900H
0910H
Table D.7 Enter Command
Contents
Write parameter data to EEPROM
Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
IMPORTANT
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100,000. Do not frequently execute Enter commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The Enter command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Communications D - 12
Error Codes
The following table shows Modbus communication error codes.
Error
Code
Table D.8 Error Codes
Contents
01H
02H
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run.
• Attempting to write via Enter commands during run.
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when a
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) fault has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) fault
• Writing parameters to the Drive during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via Enter commands during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
•
When a communication error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
•
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree.
•
When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits.
•
When the command message data length is invalid.
IMPORTANT
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
Communications D - 13
Modbus Self-Diagnosis
The Drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communication interface circuits. The self-diagnosis function connects the communication parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the
Drive, and checks if communication is being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1.
Turn ON the power supply to the Drive, and set parameter H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection) to 67
(Comm Test Mode).
2.
Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive.
3.
Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4.
Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5.
Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again.
Fig D.10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self -Diagnosis Function
6.
During normal self-diagnostic operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value. If an error occurs, a
CE (Modbus communication error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will be turned
ON, and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Communications D - 14
Appendix E
Peripheral Devices
This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices.
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection...................................... E-2
Branch Circuit Overload Protection ........................................... E-5
Peripheral Devices .................................................................... E-6
Peripheral Devices E - 1
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection
The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals
L1(R), L2(S), and L3(T). Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given installation. Use Table E.1 or E.2 when selecting fuses and circuit breakers per the NEC. When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input I
2 t protection and comply with UL, CSA, NEC, and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements, select one of the fuses in Table E.3 or E.4.
Fuse Type:
Circuit Breaker Type:
UL designated Time-Delay or Non-Time-Delay Fuse
Class: CC, J, T, RK1 or RK5
Designators (typical): KTK, FNQ, FRS, LPJ, LPS, JKS, JJN, or JJS
Voltage Rating: 250V for Drives with 208-240V input
600V for Drives with 480V input
Inverse Time (MCCB) or Instantaneous Trip (MCP)
Voltage Rating: 600V
Model
CIMR-E7U
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
Table E.1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (208-240Vac Input)
Hp
Input
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Output
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Fuse
Selection Criteria
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
0.5/0.75
4.3
3.6
6 12 15
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
5.5
9.4
13
20
24
37
53
70
89
98
120
180
4.6
7.8
10.8
16.8
23
31
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
115
162
8
15
20
30
40
60
80
110
125
150
200
250
12
15
20
30
50
80
80
125
150
150
200
250
15
15
100
125
150
20
35
45
80
175
225
300
2045
2055
2075
60
75
75/100
212
237
350
192
215
312
300
350
450
300
350
450
350
450
600
2090 125 396 360 600 600 700
2110
150
457 415 700 700 900
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.
Peripheral Devices E - 2
Model
CIMR-E7U
Table E.2 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (480Vac Input)
Hp
Input
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Output
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Fuse
Selection Criteria
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
0.5/0.75
2.2
1.8
4 10 15
1 2.5
2.1
4 10 15
45P5
47P5
49P0
4011
4015
4018
4022
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
4024
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
1.5/2
-
-
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
4.4
6.4
9
10.4
15
20
26
33
40
48
55
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
21
27
34
40
50.4
8
10
15
15
25
30
45
45
60
70
80
12
15
20
30
30
30
50
50
70
80
80
75
100
125
40
50
60
106
134
172
57
74
85
52
67.2
77
96
125
156
100
100
125
150
200
250
100
100
125
150
200
250
4090
4110
4132
4160
150
200
-
250
198
264
286
334
180
240
260
304
300
350
400
450
300
350
400
450
400
450
600
700
4185
4220
300/350
400/450
456
567
414
515
600
700
600
700
800
1000
4300 500+ 743 675 900 900 1200
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.
125
125
150
200
225
300
30
40
60
15
15
20
20
60
80
90
100
Peripheral Devices E - 3
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
Table E.3 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I
2 t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection (200V Series)
Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2
Drive
Model No.
CIMR-E7*
Fuse
Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q12-2
A60Q12-2
A60Q15-2
A60Q20-2
600V, 12A
600V, 12A
600V, 15A
600V, 20A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A070GRB006T13
A070GRB006T13
A70QS25-22F
6,900CPGRC14.51/25
700V, 6A
700V, 6A
700A, 25A
690V, 25A
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
FWH-20A14F
FWH-20A14F
FWH-20A14F
FWH-25A14F
500V, 20A
500V, 20A
500V, 20A
500V, 25A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q30-2
A50P50-4
A50P80-4
A50P80-4
600V, 30A
500V, 50A
500V, 80A
500V, 80A
Ferraz A50P125-4 500V, 125A
Ferraz A50P150-4 500V, 150A
Ferraz A50P150-4 500V, 150A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz A50P200-4 500V, 200A Bussmann
A70QS32-14F
A70QS50-14F
A50QS70-4
A50QS100-4
A50QS150-4
A50QS175-4
A50QS200-4
FWH-200B
700A, 32A
700V, 50A
500V, 70A
Bussmann
Bussmann
Bussmann
500V, 100A Bussmann
500V, 150A Bussmann
500V, 175A Bussmann
500V, 200A Bussmann
500V, 200A Bussmann
FWH-45B
FWH-80B
FWH-80B
FWH-100B
FWH-175B
FWH-200B
FWH-200B
FWH-225B
500V, 45A
500V, 80A
500V, 80A
500V, 100A
500V, 175A
500V, 200A
500V, 200A
500V, 225A
2037
2045
2055
2075
Ferraz A50P250-4 500V, 250A Ferraz
Ferraz A50P300-4 500V, 300A Ferraz
Ferraz A50P350-4 500V, 350A Bussmann
Ferraz A50P450-4 500V, 450A Ferraz
2090
2110
Ferraz A50P600-4 500V, 600A
Ferraz A50P600-4 500V, 600A
* Denotes letter A through Z
Ferraz
Ferraz
A30QS275-4
A30QS350-4
300V, 275A Bussmann 170M4610 690V, 315A
300V, 350A Bussmann FWH-350A 500V, 350A
FWH-400A 500V, 400A Bussmann FWH-450A 500V, 450A
A070URD33KI0550 700V, 550A Bussmann FWH-500A 500V, 500A
A70P600-4
A70P700-4
700V, 600A Bussmann FWH-600A 500V, 600A
700V, 700A Bussmann FWH-700A 500V, 700A
Peripheral Devices E - 4
4024
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
44P0
45P5
47P5
49P0
4011
4015
4018
4022
Table E.4 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive I
2 t Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection (400V Series)
Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2
Drive
Model No.
CIMR-E7*
Fuse
Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating Fuse Mfr.
Model No.
Rating
40P4 Ferraz A60Q10-2 600V, 10A Ferraz A070GRB006T13 700V, 6A Ferraz A70QS16-14F 690V, 16A
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q10-2
A60Q12-2
A60Q15-2
A60Q20-2
600V, 10A
600V, 12A
600V, 15A
600V, 20A
Ferraz 700V, 6A
Ferraz 6,900CPGRC14.51/25 690V, 25A
Ferraz
Ferraz
A070GRB006T13
A70QS25-22F
A70QS20-14F
700V, 25A
700V, 20A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A70QS16-14F
A70QS20-14F
A70QS20-14F
A70QS25-14F
690V, 16A
690V, 20A
690V, 20A
690V, 25A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A60Q30-2
A70P50-4
A70P50-4
A70P70-4
A70P80-4
A70P80-4
600V, 30A
600V, 30A
600V, 30A
700V, 50A
700V, 50A
700V, 70A
700V, 80A
700V, 80A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
A70QS32-14F
A70QS32-14F
A70QS40-14F
A50QS50-4
A50QS50-4
A50QS80-4
A50QS100-4
A50QS100-4
700V, 32A
700V, 32A
700V, 40A
Ferraz A70QS40-14F 690V, 40A
Ferraz A70QS40-14F 690V, 40A
-
500V, 50A Bussmann FWH-80B
-
500V, 80A
500V, 50A Bussmann FWH-80B 500V, 80A
500V, 80A Bussmann FWH-100B 500V, 100A
500V, 100A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
500V, 100A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
4132
4160
4185
4220
Ferraz A70P100-4 700V, 100A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P100-4 700V, 100A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P125-4 700V, 125A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P150-4 700V, 150A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P200-4 700V, 200A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P250-4 700V, 250A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P300-4 700V, 300A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P350-4 700V, 350A Ferraz
Ferraz A70P400-4 700V, 400A
Ferraz A70P450-4 700V, 450A
Ferraz A70P600-4 700V, 600A
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz
Ferraz A70P700-4 700V, 700A Bussmann
4300 Ferraz A70P900-4 700V, 900A Bussmann
* Denotes letter A through Z
A50QS125-4
A50QS125-4
A50QS125-4
A50QS150-4
A70QS200-4
A50QS250-4
A50QS300-4
A50P350-4
A70P500-4
A70QS700-4
A70QS700-4
FWH-800A
FWH-1000A
500V, 125A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
500V, 125A Bussmann FWH-125B 500V, 125A
500V, 125A Bussmann FWH-150B 500V, 150A
500V, 150A Bussmann FWH-175B 500V, 175A
700V, 200A Bussmann FWH-200B 500V, 200A
500V, 250A Bussmann FWH-250A 500V, 250A
500V, 300A Bussmann 170M4611 690V, 350A
500V, 350A Bussmann 170M4611 690V, 350A
700V, 500A Bussmann
700V, 700A Bussmann
700V, 700A Bussmann
500V, 800A Bussmann
500V, 1000A Bussmann
170M5610
FWH-600A
FWH-700A
FWH-1000A
FWH-1200A
690V, 500A
500V, 600A
500V, 700A
500V, 1000A
500V, 1200A
Branch Circuit Overload Protection
All models have built-in UL evaluated motor overload protection. Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC. Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single motor applications.
Peripheral Devices E - 5
Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R/LI, S/L2, and T/L3.
CAUTION
Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit.
Never connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the input or output sides, or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive. When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor, never turn it on or off during operation.
For more details on peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer.
Magnetic Contactor
Mount a surge protector on the coil. When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive, do not exceed one start per hour.
AC and DC reactor
When using models E7U20P4 thru E7U2018 and E7U40P4 thru E7U4018 on a power supply transformer with a capacity of
600kVA or more, install an AC or DC reactor. The reactor improves the input power factor and provides protection to the rectifier circuit within the Drive.
Noise filter
Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction.
Peripheral Devices E - 6
Appendix F
EMC Compatibility
EMC Compatibility..................................................................... F-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)........................................ F-3
EMC Compatibility F - 1
EMC Compatibility
Introduction
This section describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) Directive.
The manual's installation and wiring instructions must be followed for compliance.
Yaskawa products are tested by authorized organizations using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61000-3-2; A1, A2, A14:2000
Measures to Ensure Conformity of Installed Yaskawa Drives to EMC Directive
Yaskawa Drives are not required to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all possible types of installations, therefore this manual provides general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The power leads pass this on to the surrounding environment like an antenna. Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. Drive) to a supply without a line filter can allow High Frequency (HF) or Low Frequency (LF) interference to penetrate the power distribution system. The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding, and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding, straps instead of cables is therefore highly recommended.
Cable shields must be connected with ground clips.
Cable Installation
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and Drive must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible (see Fig G-2).
Use a power cable with a well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 82 feet (25 m) in length. Arrange all grounds to maximize the end of the lead area in contact with ground (e.g. metal plate).
Use a shielded cable with braided shield and ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see Fig G-1).
EMC Compatibility F - 2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Recommended EMC Filters
Drive Model
CIMR-E7U
Model Number
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
49P0/4011
4015
4018
4024/4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5973-35-07
FS5973-60-07
FS5973-100-07
FS5973-130-35
FS5973-160-40
FS5973-240-37
FS5972-10-07
FS5972-18-07
FS5972-35-07
FS5972-60-07
FS5972-70-52
FS5972-130-35
FS5972-170-40
FS5972-250-37
35 A
60 A
70 A
130 A
170 A
250 A
Current Rating
EMC Filter
Weight lb. (kg)
208-240 Vac
10 A
2.43
(1.1)
18 A
35 A
60 A
100 A
2.87
(1.3)
3.09
(1.4)
6.61
(3)
10.8
(4.9)
130 A
160 A
9.48
(4.3)
13.23
(6)
24.25
(11)
240 A
480 Vac
10 A
2.43
(1.1)
18 A
2.87
(1.3)
4.63
(2.1)
8.82
(4)
7.5
(3.4)
10.36
(4.7)
13.23
(6)
24.25
(11)
Dimensions inches (mm)
Nominal
Hp
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
8 x 14 x 2.375
(206 x 355 x 60)
9.3125 x 16 x 3.125
(236 x 408 x 80)
3.5315 x 14.40625 x 7
(90 x 366 x 180)
4.750 x 17.750 x 6.6875
(120 x 451 x 170)
5.125 x 24 x 9.4375
(130 x 610 x 240)
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
5.500 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
5.50 x 13 x 1.875
(141 x 330 x 46)
8.125 x 14 x 1.9375
(206 x 355 x 50)
9.250 x 16 x 2.50
(236 x 408 x 65)
3 x 13 x 7.250
(80 x 329 x 185)
3.5 x 14.375 x 7
(90 x 366 x 180)
4.750 x 17.750 x 6.6675
(120 x 451 x 170)
5.125 x 24 x 9.4375
(130 x 610 x 240)
25
30
40/50
60
75
100
125
150
200
0.5/0.75
1
1.5/2
3
5
7.5
10
15
EMC Compatibility F - 3
Ground clip Ground plate
Fig G-1 Grounding Surface Layout
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any varnish or paint from grounding surfaces.
•
Ground the cable shields at both ends.
•
Ground the motor of the machine/application.
L1
L2
L3
PE
Grounding
Remove varnish or paint
Metal plate
E7 Drive
EMC
Filter
Cable length
Maximum of 15.75”
Grounding
Remove varnish or paint
M
Fig G-2 EMC Filter Layout
Motor cable
Length
Maximum of
82 feet
EMC Compatibility F - 4
A
A. TUNE menu........................................................3-7, 3-14
AC Reactor .......................................................................E-4
Accel/Decel
Parameters ................................................................ A-7
Time......................................................................... 5-25
Acceleration
Stall Prevention Level during.............. 5-40, 6-17, A-20
Time.................................................................5-25, A-7
Troubleshooting....................................................... 6-17
Access Level.............................................................5-2, A-2
ADV menu...............................................................3-7, 3-13
Alarm Displays & Processing........................................... 6-9
ALARM Indicator ............................................................ 3-5
Altitude ............................................................................ C-4
Ambient Temperature ............................................. 1-13, C-4
Analog Inputs
Bias ...................................................... 5-33, 5-38, A-16
Connection Diagram................................................ 2-18
Control Circuit Terminals........................................ 2-14
Gain ..................................................... 5-33, 5-38, A-16
Parameters ..............................................A-4, A-9, A-16
Troubleshooting....................................................... 6-15
Analog Outputs
Bias ............................................................... A-17, A-18
Connection Diagram................................................ 2-18
Control Circuit Terminals........................................ 2-14
Gain ........................................................................ A-17
Parameters .................................................... A-17, A-18
Annunciation Contacts .................................................. A-15
APOGEE FLN .................................................. iv, A-18, D-1
ASIC Faults ...................................................................... 6-3
Auto
AUTO Key ................................................................ 3-3
Mode.......................................................................... 3-5
REF Indicator .....................................................3-2, 3-6
SEQ Indicator ....................................................3-2, 3-5
Auto Restart..........................................................5-44, A-21
Count Reset ............................................................. 5-44
Faults Covered......................................................... 5-45
Max. Restart Time After Fault ................................ 5-44
Number of Attempts................................................ 5-44
Auto-Tuning
Fault Displays and Processing................................. 6-13
How to ..................................................................... 5-59
Menu.................................................................3-7, 3-14
Motor Rated Current .............................................. A-25
Motor Rated Power ................................................ A-25
B
BAS Communication ....................................... iii, A-18, D-1
Base Block
After Fault..................................................... 5-44, A-19
Circuit Fault ...............................................................6-2
Minimum Time ....................................... 5-7, A-19, B-4
Basic Programming.............................................. 5-1 to 5-60
Baud Rate .............................................. 6-9, A-18, D-2, D-4
Bias Adjustments .............................. 5-33, 5-38, A-16, A-17
Braking
DC Injection...................................................... 5-9, A-4
High-Slip.................................................................A-23
Branch Short Circuit Protection............................... E-2, E-3
Broken Belt (Undertorque detection)..............................5-46
C
Cable Length ......................................................... 2-11, 6-18
Capacitors .........................................................................7-2
Capacity, Rated Output ........................................... C-2, C-3
Capacity Related Parameters .......................................... B-1
Carrier Frequency
Error .........................................................................6-12
Lower Limit ..............................................................A-8
Parameters.................................................................A-8
Proportional Gain......................................................A-8
Selection ...................................................................A-8
Upper limit........................................................A-8, B-3
Vs. Cable Length ........................................... 2-11, 6-18
Characteristic Frequency ................................................6-19
Charge Indicator (LED) ............................. 1-6, 2-2, 4-5, C-4
Circuit Breakers ................................................ 2-9, E-2, E-3
Clearances .......................................................................1-14
Coast to Stop ..........................................................................
....................... 5-6, 5-32, 5-48, A-4, A-11, A-18, A-19, A-22
Com OPT Setup Parameters..................................5-32, A-11
Communications Modbus/Serial....................... D-1 to D-14
Errors (CPF).............................................6-2 to 6-4, 6-9
Parameters...............................................................A-18
Components ................................................1-5, 1-6, 3-2, 7-2
Configuration
Electrical ................................................... 1-5, 1-6, 2-18
Physical......................................................... 1-7 to 1-10
Connections.................................................... 2-2, 2-14, 2-18
Preventive Maintenance.............................................7-3
Connectors
Inspection...................................................................7-2
Sizing .............................................................. 2-3 to 2-7
Contactors
Magnetic ................................................................... E-4
Soft Charge ............................................. 6-8, 6-11, 6-22
Index - 1
Control Circuit
Characteristics ........................................ 2-2, 2-11, 2-12
Connection Diagram................................................2-18
Analog Input Configuration.....................................2-12
PCB........................................................................... B-2
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Power Fuse .......................................................6-23
Terminal Functions ..................................................2-14
Wiring..................................................... 2-12, 2-18
Precautions .......................................................2-19
Cooling............................................................................1-13
Fan ....................... 5-49, 6-9, 6-24, 7-4, 7-5, A-22, A-25
Fins ............................................6-5, 6-10, 7-2, 7-3, C-4
COPY Function.................................................. 5-56 to 5-58
Faults .......................................................................6-14
Parameters .............................................................. A-25
Covers
Protective .................................................................1-13
Removable ......................................................... 1-5, 1-6
Removing and Attaching ............................... 1-15, 1-16
CPU Faults ........................................................................6-3
Critical Frequency Rejection ............... 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Current
DC Injection Braking.........................................5-9, A-4
Maximum Output (Overload Capacity).................... C-4
Monitor (Analog Output).................... 2-14, A-17, A-26
Motor Rated (FLA).....4-6, 5-31, 6-13, A-11, A-25, B-4
Rated Output .......................... 1-2, 1-11, 5-23, C-2, C-3
D
DATA/ENTER Key ..................................... 3-3, 5-54, A-24,
Usage ...............................................3-8, 3-15, 5-2, 6-16
Data Length.............................................. A-18, D-1 to D-14
Date Stamp Information..................................................6-25
DC Braking ...............................................................5-9, A-4
DC Bus Capacitors
Inspecting...................................................................7-2
Preventive Maintenance ............................................7-3
DC Bus Fuse
Checking ..................................................................6-22
Fault (PUF) ................................................................6-7
DC Bus Voltage
Checking ..................................................................6-21
Overvoltage ............................................. 6-6, 6-10, C-4
Safety ......................................................................i, 7-2
Undervoltage ............................................6-7, 6-11, C-4
DC Injection Braking
Current .......................................................................5-9
Parameters ................................................................ A-4
Start Frequency..........................................................5-9
Time at Start and Stop............................ 5-10, 6-20, A-4
DC Reactor ....................................................... 2-8, C-2, E-4
DCInj to Stop ....................................................................5-7
DDC................................................................................ 6-18
DDLY, Waiting to RUN ............................................5-8, A-4
Deadband, Prohibited (Jump) Frequency ...............5-27, A-9
Deceleration
Stopping Method ....................................................... 5-6
Stop Indicator ............................................................ 3-6
Stall Prevention during ..................................5-40, A-20
Time.........................................................5-25, A-7, C-4
Troubleshooting...................................... 6-6, 6-10, 6-18
Decimal, converting to hex............................................ A-30
DECREASE Key.....................................................3-3, 5-37
Troubleshooting....................................................... 6-15
Delay Timer Parameters .......................................... A-4, A-5
Diagnostics ................................................ 6-1 to 6-25, D-14
Digital Inputs
Connection Diagram................................................ 2-18
Control Circuit Terminals...............................2-12, 2-14
Parameters .................................................A-12 to A-14
Sinking/Sourcing Modes ......................................... 2-17
Troubleshooting................................................6-9, 6-15
Digital “Motor Operated Pot” ..............................5-54, A-24
Digital Operator................................................................ 3-1
Copy Function ..................................... 5-56, 6-14, A-25
Data Display .............................................................. 3-2
Display Selection (Display Scaling)..............5-52, A-23
Drive Operation when Disconnected ............5-55, A-24
Faults/Errors ............................................. 6-2, 6-6, 6-15
Keys........................................................................... 3-3
LCD Brightness Adjustment .................................. A-24
Lights.......................................................... 3-2, 3-5, 3-6
Mode Indicators......................................................... 3-5
Mode Selection ......................................................... 3-3
Monitor Selection (At Power-up)..................5-51, A-23
Preventive Maintenance ............................................ 7-3
Removing and Attaching................................1-17, 1-18
Write-protected.................................... 5-56, 6-14, A-25
Digital Outputs
Connection Diagram................................................ 2-18
Control Circuit Terminals...............................2-12, 2-14
Parameters .............................................................. A-15
Dimensions ................................................. 1-7 to 1-10, 1-14
Diode Module
Inspection .................................................................. 7-2
Resistance Test ...............................................6-21, 6-22
DIP Switch S1 .............................................. 2-15, 5-35, D-3
Displaying Faults.............................. 3-10, 3-11, A-28, A-29
“Down Arrow” Key....................................... 3-3, 5-37, 6-15
DRIVE menu .............................................................3-7, 3-9
Drive Delay Time .....................................................5-9, A-4
Drive Mode, Troubleshooting ........................................ 6-16
DriveWizard Software ............................................... iv, 5-58
Index - 2
E
EEPROM............................................. 6-2, 6-12, 6-14, D-12
Elapsed Timer
Monitor............................................... 3-9 to 3-11, A-27
Parameters ................... 5-55, A-24, A-25, A-27 to A-29
Electrical Installation........................................................ 2-1
EMC ................................................................................. F-1
Enclosed wall-mounted ..................................1-5 to 1-9, C-4
Enclosure Style (type) ....................................... 1-2, 1-4, C-4
Energy Saving
Parameters ........................................................ A-7, B-3
Selection.................................................................. 5-24
Environment ...........................................1-13, 6-18, 7-3, C-4
ESC Key ........................................................................... 3-3
External Faults (EF) .............................. 2-14, 6-4, 6-9, A-14
F
Factory Repair ..........................................Inside Back Cover
Fan, Heatsink Cooling
Checking ................................................................. 6-24
Cumulative Operation Time Setting ...................... A-25
Fuse, Checking........................................................ 6-24
Inspecting .......................................................... 7-2, 7-3
Operation Delay Time ................................... 5-49, A-22
Operation Selection....................................... 5-49, A-22
Replacement Method ......................................... 7-4, 7-5
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-10
Fast-Stop Time ...................................5-25, A-7, A-13, A-14
Faults
Clearing ........................................................... 3-3, A-25
Covered by Auto Restart ......................................... 5-45
Detection ................................................................... 6-2
Digital Output Signal ..................................... 2-14, A15
Effect on Auto Restart............................................. 5-45
History........................................................... 3-11, A-29
Listing of ................................................................... 6-2
Reset......................................................3-3, A-13, A-21
Trace.............................................................. 3-10, A-28
Feedback (PI Function) .......................................... 5-15, A-5
Differential .................................................... 5-36, A-16
Loss Detection................................................. 5-18, A-6
Square Root Function Activation.................... 5-23, A-6
Field Service.............................................Inside Back Cover
Field Wiring............................................................. 2-3, 2-12
FLA, Motor .................................4-6, 5-31, 6-13, A-11, B-3
Flash ID ........................................................................ A-27
Floating Point (Up/Down) Control ...................... 6-14, A-12
Forward Run/Stop Command................................ 2-14, 2-18
Programming..............................................5-4, 5-5, A-4
Frequency Detection...................................................... A-15
Frequency, Output
Accuracy ...................................................................C-4
Command Selection .................................................. 5-4
Jump.............................................. 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Lower Limit .....................................................5-26, A-9
Max. Output...........................................5-29, A-10, C-2
Meter (Analog Monitor) ......................................... A-17
Mid Output ............................................................. A-10
Minimum Output ...........................................6-16, A-10
Monitor (U1-02) ..................................................... A-26
Prohibited...................................... 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Rated ......................................................................... C-2
Setting Resolution..................................................... C-4
Setting Signal (Speed Command)............................. C-4
Troubleshooting ............................................. 5-27, 6-20
Upper Limit ........................................... 5-26, 6-20, A-9
Frequency Reference (speed command)
Analog Input ................................ 2-12, 2-18, A-4, A-16
Bias ................................................... 5-33 to 5-38, A-16
Gain .................................................. 5-33 to 5-38, A-16
Loss Detection ...............................................5-43, A-21
Lower Limit .....................................................5-26, A-9
Preset References 1 to 4............................................ A-8
Terminals .............................................. 2-12, 2-14, 2-18
Upper Limit ........................................... 5-26, 6-20, A-9
Setting Method Selection (MOP) ..................5-54, A-24
Source (b1-01) ........................................... 3-6, 5-4, A-4
Full Load Amps (FLA) ................ 4-6, 5-31, 6-13, A-11, B-3
Fuse Blown Protection........................ 6-7, 6-22 to 6-24, C-4
FWD Indicator ..................................................................3-5
G
Gain Adjustments ....................................... 5-33, 5-38, A-16
Gate Drive PCBs
Inspecting...................................................................7-2
Ground Fault Function.................................. 5-45, 6-4, A-22
Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
Troubleshooting .......................................................6-19
Grounding ..........................................2-11 to 2-14, 4-3, 6-18
Protection.................................................................. C-4
Shield Wire .................................................... 2-12, 2-18
Terminals ..........................................1-5, 1-6, 2-2 to 2-8
H
Hand
Frequency Reference Selection .............. 5-3, A-4, A-27
Indicators ........................................................... 3-5, 3-6
HAND Key ................................................................3-4
Function Selection ...........................................A-25
Mode ................................................................ 3-4, 5-37
Troubleshooting .......................................................6-16
Hardware Protection Parameters ..........................5-48, A-22
Harmonics, Mitigation ............................................. C-2, C-3
Heat Loss Data.......................................................1-11, 1-14
Heatsink Fan ................................................. 5-49, 7-2, A-25
Hex, converting to decimal ............................................ A-30
Index - 3
High-Slip Braking ......................................................... A-23
H/O/A (Hand/Off/Auto) .........................................3-2 to 3-6
Horsepower, converting to kW....................................... 5-59
Humidity......................................................................... 1-13
Ambient Operating....................................................C-4
Hunting Prevention
Parameters .............................................................. A-23
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-19
I
IEC IP00 ............................................................ 1-2, 1-4, C-4
IEC IP20 .................................................................... 1-2, 1-4
IGBT (Transistor Module)
Inspecting .................................................................. 7-2
Testing ..................................................................... 6-23
INCREASE Key...................................................... 3-3, 5-54
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-15
Indicators, Mode......................................... 3-2, 3-5, 3-6, 4-5
Initialization ............................................................ 5-1, A-2
Mode Selection.......................................................... 5-3
Parameters ...................................................... A-2, A-24
User ........................................................5-3, 5-54, A-24
Input
Diodes .....................................................6-21, 6-22, 7-2
Fuses ................................................ 2-9, 2-10, E-2, E-3
Multi-function Terminals
Analog Inputs...........................................................
.......... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 5-33, 5-38, A-4, A-9, A-16
Digital Inputs ...........................................................
...............2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 6-15, 6-19, A-12 to A14
Phase Loss Detection Level ............................ 6-7, A-22
Power............................................................... 2-18, C-2
Terminal Status (U1-10)......................................... A-26
Voltage.................................................... A-10, C-2, C-3
Setting .............................................4-5, 5-22, A-10
Inspection
Periodic ..................................................................... 7-2
Receiving................................................................... 1-3
Installation
Electrical ................................................................... 2-1
Physical ..................................................................... 1-1
Orientation & Clearances................................. 1-14
Site ........................................................... 1-11, C-4
Integral Control (PI) ....................................................... 5-16
Interference....................................................................... F-1
J
Jog Frequency Reference ................... 2-14, 2-18, A-8, A-12
Jump Frequency .................................. 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
K
Keypad .................................................................3-1 to 3-16 kVA ......................................................................... 1-11, C-2
Auto-Tuning ..................................................5-59, A-25
Error............................................................... 6-12, 6-14
Parameters Affected by............................................. B-3
Selection ................................................................. A-24 kW, Converting from HP ................................................5-59 kWH User Monitor Initialization................................... A-25
L
Label, Control Terminals ..................................................2-2
Lamps, Indicator .........................................3-2, 3-5, 3-6, 4-5
Language Selection...................................................5-2, A-2
LCD Display ............................................................. 3-2, 3-8
LED (Indicators) .........................................3-2, 3-5, 3-6, 4-5
Lights ..........................................................3-2, 3-5, 3-6, 4-5
Line-borne Interference Interference ................................F-2
Line-to-Line Resistance, Motor ..................................... A-11
LonWorks..............................................................iv, 5-4, 5-5
Loss of Load .........................................................5-46, A-21
M
Main Circuit
Configuration................................................... 2-9, 2-10
Terminals ............................... 1-5, 1-6, 2-2 to 2-8, 2-18
Test Procedure .........................................................6-21
Wire Sizes and Connectors ............................. 2-3 to 2-7
Wiring Diagrams......................................................2-18
Main Menu
Functions ...................................................................3-7
Structure........................................................ 3-8 to 3-14
Maintenance......................................................................7-1
Mass, Drive (Weight).................................... 1-3, 1-7 to 1-10
Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection ..................
..............................................................................5-39, A-16
Master/Slave .......................................................D-2 to D-14
Mechanical Vibration........................... 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Mechanical Resonance ........................ 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
MENU Key ............................................................... 3-3, 3-7
Menu Trees, Digital Operator .............................. 3-8 to 3-14
Metasys ....................................................... iii, iv, A-18, D-1
Meters ............................................................................ A-23
Modbus Communications ...................................D-1 to D-14
Baud Rate ........................................................6-9, A-18
Terminals ....................................................... 2-12, 2-14
Mode Selection ..................................................... 3-3 to 3-6
Model Number ....................................................... 1-2 to 1-4
Modified Constants (Parameters) Menu ................. 3-7, 3-14
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) ....................E-2, E-3
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru.........................................
............................................ 5-11, 5-39, A-5, A-19, B-3, C-4
Monitor
Configuration...........................................................5-50
Parameter List....................................... 3-9, A-26, A-27
Index - 4
Power-On Monitor ........................................ 5-51, A-23
User Monitor .......................................5-51, A-23, A-24
MONITOR Key................................................................ 3-3
MOP (Motor Operated Pot) Function ........5-54, A-12, A-24
Reference Memory................................................... A-9
Motor
Auto-Tuning ............................................................ 5-59
Fault Displays & Processing............................ 6-13
How to.............................................................. 5-59
Menu ......................................................... 3-7, 3-14
Motor Rated Current ....................................... A-25
Motor Rated Power ......................................... A-25
Direction........................................................... 4-7, 6-17
No-Load Current (NLA) ............................... 5-32, A-11
Parameters ...............................................................A-11
Pre-Heat Current ............................................. 5-11, A-4
Protection ..................................................................C-4
Overheat .......................................................... A-19
Overload.......................................................... A-19
Rated Current (FLA) .. 4-6, 5-31, 6-13, A-11, A-25, B-4
Rated Voltage ...................................4-5, 4-6, A-10, C-2
Speed (U1-02) ................................................ 3-9, A-26
Stopping Method Selection ........................4-7, 5-6, A-4
Temperature Input ........................................ A-16, A-19
Troubleshooting ..........................................6-16 to 6-20
Wiring......................................................2-3, 2-11, 2-18
Mounting, Dimensions .........................................1-7 to 1-10
Multi-function Analog Inputs.................................................
........................ 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 5-33, 5-38, A-4, A-9, A-16
Multi-function Analog Outputs ......... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, A-17
Multi-function Digital Inputs .................................................
............................. 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 6-9, 6-15, A-12 to A-14
Multi-function Digital Outputs.......... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, A-15
Multi-step Speed Reference (Preset Speed) .................... A-8
N
Nameplate Information.............................................. 1-3, 1-4
NEMA Type 1 ........................................................... 1-2, 1-4
Noise
Cooling Fan........................................................ 7-2, 7-3
Electrical ................................................................... F-1
Filter .................................................................. E-4, F-1
Mechanical ................................... 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
No-Load Current (NLA) ..................................... 5-32, A-11
O
OFF Key ...........................................................................3-4
Function during Auto Run ...................................... A-24
Off-delay Timer ............................................................... A-5
On-delay Timer ................................................ 5-9, A-4, A-5
Open Chassis........................... 1-2, 1-4, 1-9, 1-10, 1-13, C-4
Operation
Menu .................................................................. 3-7, 3-9
Status (U1-12)......................................................... A-26
Operator Programming Errors (OPE) .............................6-12
Option
Card Faults......................................................... 6-3, 6-4
Communication Error Selection ....................5-32, A-11
LonWorks Communication Setup..................5-32, A-11
Options (Peripheral Devices)........................................... E-4
Orientation, Drive ...........................................................1-14
Oscillation............................................ 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Output
Current Monitor (U1-03) .................... 2-14, A-17, A-26
Frequency (See Frequency, Output) .............. C-2 to C-4
Ground Fault Detection Selection ......... 5-45, 6-4, A-22
Monitors............................................. A-17, A-26, A-27
Power Monitor (U1-08) .......................................... A-26
Power Ratings........................ 1-2, 1-3, 1-11, C-2 to C-4
Terminal Status Monitor (U1-11) ........................... A-26
Transistors (IGBT)
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Testing ..............................................................6-23
Voltage Monitor (U1-06) ........................................ A-26
Outputs, Analog ................................ 2-14, 2-18, A-17, A-18
Outputs, Digital ................................. 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, A-15
Over Current (OC) ........................................... 5-7, 5-45, 6-5
Overheat (OH)
Alarms/Faults..................................................................
................... 5-45, 5-48, 6-5, 6-6, 6-10, A-19, A-22, B-3
And Auto Restart .....................................................5-45
Cooling Fin (Heatsink) ................... 5-49, 6-5, 6-10, C-4
Drive ..............................................................1-13, A-22
Motor ............................................ 6-6, 6-10, 6-18, A-19
Parameters ....................................................A-19, A-22
Pre-Alarm ......................................................6-10, A-22
Overload
Alarms/Faults................................................... 5-45, 6-6
And Auto Restart .....................................................5-45
Capacity .................................................................... C-4
Drive ................................................................ 5-31, 6-5
Motor .................................................... 6-6, A-15, A-19
Protection........................................................ A-19, C-4
Overtorque - See Torque Detection .....................5-46, A-21
Overvoltage Protection .......................... 5-28, 6-6, 6-10, C-4
And Auto Restart .....................................................5-45
DC Bus - See DC Bus Voltage ................ 6-6, 6-10, C-4
Index - 5
P
Parameters
Accel/Decel (C1-01 - C1-11) ................................... A-7
Analog Inputs (H3-02 - H3-13).............................. A-16
Analog Outputs (H4-01 - H4-08)................. A-17, A-18
Auto-Tuning (T1-02 - T1-04) ................................ A-25
Capacity Related .......................................................B-1
Carrier Freq (C6-02 - C6-05) ................................... A-8
Com OPT Setup (F6-01 - F6-05) ............................A-11
COPY Function (o3-01 - o3-02) ............................ A-25
DC Braking (b2-01 - b2-09)..................................... A-4
Delay timers (b4-01 - b4-02).................................... A-5
Digital Inputs (H1-01 - H1-05) ................. A-12 to A-14
Digital Outputs (H2-01 - H2-02)............................ A-15
Energy Saving (b8-01 - b8-06) ................................ A-7
Example of Changing..................................... 3-15, 3-16
Factory Reset (Initialize).......................................... A-2
Fault Restart (L5-01 - L5-03)................................. A-21
Hdwe Protection (L8-01 - L8-19) .......................... A-22
High Slip Breaking (n3-01 - n3-04) ....................... A-23
Hunting Prevention (n1-01 - n1-02)....................... A-23
Initialization (A1-00 - A1-05).................................. A-2
Jump Frequencies (d3-01 - d3-04) ........................... A-9
Key Selections (o2-01 - o2-15) .................... A-24, A-25
Listing of ..................................................... A-1 to A-29
Modified........................................................... 3-7, 3-14
Monitor Select (o1-01 - o1-08) .................... A-23, A-24
MOP/Trim Control (d4-01 - d4-02) ......................... A-9
Motor Overload (L1-01 - L1-05) ........................... A-19
Motor Setup (E2-01 - E2-05) ..................................A-11
PI Control (b5-01 - b5-30) ............................... A-5, A-6
Preset Reference (Speeds) (d1-01 - d1-17) .............. A-8
Programming (Basic) ....................................5-1 to 5-60
PwrLoss Ridethru (L2-01 - L2-05) ........................ A-19
Ref Detection (L4-01 - L4-06)............................... A-21
Reference Limits (d2-01 - d2-03) ............................ A-9
S-Curve Acc/Dec (C2-01 - C2-02) .......................... A-7
Sequence (b1-01 - b1-12)......................................... A-4
Serial Com Setup (H5-01 - H5-09) ........................ A-18
Setting and Reading ......................................3-7 to 3-16
Speed Search (b3-01 - b3-14) .................................. A-5
Stall Prevention (L3-01 - L3-06)............................ A-20
Torque Comp (C4-01 - C4-02)................................. A-8
Torque Detection (L6-01 - L6-03) ......................... A-21
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-15
User Limited Access (A2-01 - A2-32)............. A-2, A-3
V/f Pattern (E1-01 - E1-13).................................... A-10
Parity - See Modbus Communications........................... D-2
Parts
Ordering Replacement ......................Inside Back Cover
Password
Setting ...................................................................... A-2
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-15
PCB
Control
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Gate Drive
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Power
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Terminal
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Removing and Mounting....................................7-6
Peripheral Devices
AC and DC reactor ................................................... E-4
Magnetic Contactor .................................................. E-4
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB).................... E-2
Noise filter ................................................................ E-4
Troubleshooting .......................................................6-18
Phase Loss Detection
Input.................................................................6-7, A-22
Phase-to-Phase Short ................................ 6-5, 6-7, 6-10
Physical Installation - See Installation, Physical ..............1-1
PI Function
Accel/Decel Time ............................................5-19, A-6
Block Diagram.........................................................5-15
Feedback ............................ 5-15 to 5-18, 6-4, 6-10, A-6
Differential .............................................5-15, A-16
Loss Detection Level................................5-18, A-6
Loss Detection Time.................................5-18, A-6
Reference Missing Detection ...................5-18, A-5
Square Root Activation ............................5-23, A-6
Integral Limit Setting.......................................5-16, A-5
Integral Time Setting .......................................5-17, A-5
Maximum Boost Time .....................................5-22, A-6
Offset Adjustment............................................5-17, A-5
Output ..............................................................5-17, A-5
Gain Setting ..............................................5-18, A-5
Level Selection .........................................5-17, A-5
Limit .........................................................5-17, A-5
Primary Delay Time Constant ..................5-17, A-5
Square Root Monitor ................................5-23, A-6
Parameters .................................. 5-15 to 5-23, A-5, A-6
Proportional Gain (PI) ....................................5-14, A-5
Setpoint ............................................................5-15, A-6
Boost Setting ............................................5-21, A-6
Display Scaling.........................................5-20, A-6
Selection ...................................................5-19, A-6
Value .........................................................5-20, A-6
Sleep
Delay Time ...............................................5-19, A-6
Function............................................................5-19
Function Start Level .................................5-19, A-6
Input Source .............................................5-21, A-6
Snooze
Deactivation Level ...................................5-21, A-6
Delay Time ...............................................5-21, A-6
Feedback Level.........................................5-22, A-6
Index - 6
Function ........................................................... 5-21
Level ........................................................ 5-21, A-6
Square Root Gain ............................................ 5-23, A-6
PI Mode .................................................................. 5-15, A-5
PI Monitors
Feedback (U1-24).......................................... 5-20, A-27
Output (U1-37).............................................. 5-19, A-27
Setpoint (U1-38)............................................ 5-20, A-27
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
Serial Com. Using Modbus Protocol ....................... D-2
Plenum Rated ................................................................. 1-13
Potentiometer (Connection) .................................. 2-12, 2-18
Power
Energy Saving ................................................. 5-24, A-7
Output, +15Vdc.............................................. 2-14, 2-18
Loss Ride-thru ...................................... 5-39, A-19, C-4
PCB
Inspecting ........................................................... 7-2
Supply Specifications........................................C-2, C-3
Power Factor Correction Capacitors ................................ 6-6
Pre-Operation Considerations ................ i to iv; 1-1, 2-1, 4-1
Preset Speeds................................................................... A-8
Preventive Maintenance ................................................... 7-1
Programming
Basic..............................................................5-1 to 5-60
Error (OPE) ............................................................. 6-12
Menu .............................................................3-7 to 3-16
Protective
Functions ...................................................................C-4
Enclosure...................................................................C-4
Parameters .............................................................. A-22
PWM Frequency - See Carrier Frequency ...................... A-8
Q
Quick Setting Menu ................................................ 3-7, 3-12
R
Ramp to Stop ............................................................ 5-6, A-4
Rated Current, Motor ........ 4-6, 5-31, 6-13, A-11, A-25, B-4
Rdy (Ready) ..................................................................... 3-2
Reactors, Preventive Maintenance ................................... 7-3
READ ................................................................... 5-56, A-25
Ready Display .................................................................. 3-2
Receiving.......................................................................... 1-3
REF Indicator .....................................................3-2, 3-5, 3-6
Reference Limits (see Frequency).................5-26, 6-19, A-9
Reference Selection
Auto........................................................................... 3-3
Hand .......................................................................... 3-4
Reference Source...............................................3-6, 5-4, A-4
Relays, Digital Output................ 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 7-3, A-15
RESET Key ...................................................................... 3-3
Resistance, Motor Line-to-Line ..................................... A-11
Resonance ............................................ 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
REV Indicator .................................................................3-5
Reverse Operation.....................................................5-8, A-4
Prohibiting ............................................... 5-8, 6-17, A-4
Reverse Run/Stop command................................. 2-14, 2-18
Ride-thru, Momentary Power Loss........................................
............................................ 5-11, 5-39, A-5, A-19, B-3, C-4
“Right Arrow” Key ...........................................................3-3
RS-485/422 .......................................................................5-5
Communication Wiring ............................................ D-3
Control Circuit Terminals .............................. 2-14, 2-18
Parameters ..................................... 5-4, 5-32, A-4, A-18
Terminating Resistance....................................2-15, D-3
RTS Control Selection ................................................... A-18
Run Command
During Programing ............................................5-8, A-4
External, Troubleshooting .......................................6-16
Selection ............................................. 3-5, 4-6, 5-4, A-4
Source ........................................................ 3-4, 5-4, A-4
Terminals ....................................................... 2-14, 2-18
RUN Indicator........................................................... 3-1, 3-6
Running
Signal (output) .........................................................2-14
Stall Prevention during ..................................5-42, A-20
S
Safety Circuit ......................................... 4-3, 4-4, 2-14, A-14
Scaling Display
Digital Operator .............................................5-52, A-23
PI Setpoint .......................................................5-20, A-6
Schematic Diagram...............................2-9, 2-10, 2-17, 2-18
S-Curve Characteristic ..................................................... A-7
SEQ ........................................................................... 3-2, 3-5
Sequence Parameters ....................................................... A-4
Serial Communications.......................................D-1 to D-14
Address ..................................................................... D-4
Baud Rate ....................................... 6-9, A-18, D-2, D-4
Drive Node Address ................................................. D-4
Parameters ............................................A-11, A-18, D-4
Run Command ...........................................................5-4
Self-Diagnosis Function ......................................... D-14
Station Address......................................................... D-5
Stop bits .................................................................... D-1
Serial Number ...................................................................1-3
Setpoint (PI Function)...........................................5-20, A-27
Boost Setting....................................................5-21, A-6
Display Scaling................................................5-17, A-6
Selection ................................................ 5-15, 5-19, A-6
Value ................................................................5-20, A-6
SHIFT/RESET Key ..........................................................3-3
Shield Wire Grounding ......................................... 2-12, 2-18
Shipping Damage..............................................................1-3
Short Circuit Protection, Branch...............................E-2, E-3
Index - 7
Shunt Connector CN15 ........................................ 2-16, A-18
Sinking/Sourcing Mode.................................................. 2-17
Skip Frequency.................................... 5-27, 6-19, 6-20, A-9
Slave ................................................................................ D-2
Sleep Function........................................................ 5-19, A-6
Snooze Function ............................................5-21, 5-22, A-6
Soft Charge Contactor
Alarm....................................................................... 6-11
Checking ................................................................. 6-22
Fault........................................................................... 6-8
Soft Charge Resistor
Checking ................................................................. 6-22
Preventive Maintenance ............................................ 7-3
Soft CLA Selection ....................................................... A-22
Soft Start.......................................................................... A-7
Software Number (U1-14)............................................. A-27
SPEC ......................................................................... 1-3, 1-4
Specifications ...................................................................C-1
Design ............................................................. 1-4, A-25
General ......................................................................C-4
Standard Drive
208-240 VAC .....................................................C-2
480 VAC.............................................................C-3
Nameplate .......................................................... 1-3
Speed
Agreement ...........................................5-46, A-15, A-21
Control Accuracy ......................................................C-4
Range.........................................................................C-4
Speed Command - See Frequency Reference
0-10Vdc......................................... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 4-9
4-20mA ......................................... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18, 4-9
Limits .....................................................5-26, 6-20, A-9
Loss Detection............................................... 5-43, A-21
Selection............................................. 3-6, 4-6, 5-4, A-4
Setting Selection...................................................... 5-54
Signal Polarity.................................................. 2-12, 4-9
Troubleshooting ............................................. 6-16, 6-17
Speed Reference, Multiple ....................................................
(Multi-step Speed Operation)................................... A-8
Speed Search ................................................................. 5-11
Auto-Tuning ........................................................... 5-59
Parameters ................................................................ A-5
Stall Prevention
Parameters ..................................................... 5-40, A-20
Specifications ............................................................C-4
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-17
Start-up ...................................................................4-1 to 4-9
Assistance..........................................Inside Back Cover
Benchmark data......................................................... 4-8
Preparation for........................................................... 4-2
Procedure................................................................... 4-5
STOP Indicator.......................................................... 3-2, 3-6
Stopping Method ....................................... 4-7, 5-6, 5-7, A-4
Coast to Stop ............................................................. 5-5
Coast w/Timer ........................................................... 5-6
DcInj to Stop..............................................................5-7
External Fault from OPT Card................................ A-11
Modbus Communications......................................... D-4
Ramp to Stop .............................................................5-6
Selection (OH) ..............................................5-48, A-22
Storage Temperature ........................................................ C-4
Switching Frequency (Carrier Frequency) .....2-11, A-8, B-3
T
Technical Support .................................... Inside Back Cover
Technical Training ................................... Inside Back Cover
Temperature
Ambient Operating ..........................................1-13, C-4
Ambient, Setting ..................................................... A-22
Effect on Frequency Accuracy ................................. C-4
Storage ...................................................................... C-4
Troubleshooting .......................................................6-18
Terminal PCB, Control
Inspecting...................................................................7-2
Removing and Mounting ...........................................7-6
Terminal A1 ...................................... 2-14, 2-18, 5-33, A-16
Terminal A2 ..............................2-14, 2-18, 5-35, 5-38, A-16
Terminal AM .................................... 2-14, 2-18, A-17, A-18
Terminal FM .................................... 2-14, 2-18, A-17, A-18
Terminal M1-M2 ........................................ 2-14, 2-18, A-15
Terminal M3-M4 ........................................ 2-14, 2-18, A-15
Terminal R+, R-, S+, S- ................................ 2-14, 2-18, D-3
Terminal S1, S2.......................................2-14, 2-18, 5-3, 5-5
Terminals S3 to S7 ........................ 2-14, 2-18, A-12 to A-14
Terminal
Arrangement ............................................... 1-5, 1-6, 2-2
Configuration.............................................................2-2
Connections .............................................................2-18
Control Circuit ...................................... 2-12, 2-14, 2-18
Main Circuit ................................................... 2-3 to 2-8
Inspecting ...........................................................7-2
Wiring...................................................... 2-3 to 2-7
Screw Sizes..................................................... 2-3 to 2-7
Terminating Resistance...........................................2-15, D-3
Three-Wire Operation .......................................................5-5
Timers, Delay................................................................... A-5
Timers, Elapsed.....................................................5-55, A-25
Timer, On Delay........................................................5-9, A-4
Torque Compensation ...................................................... A-8
Torque Detection
Faults .........................................................................6-6
Level .............................................................. 5-46, 5-47
Nuisance ..................................................................5-46
Parameters .............................................................. A-21
Selection ........................................................ 5-46, 5-47
Time ............................................................... 5-46, 5-47
Torque Output .................................................................6-17
Transformers, Preventive Maintenance ............................7-3
Index - 8
Transistor Module
Inspecting .................................................................. 7-2
Test .......................................................................... 6-23
Trim Control Level.......................................................... A-9
Troubleshooting....................................................6-1 to 6-25
Two-Wire Operation......................................................... 5-5
Twelve-pulse rectification ................................ 2-9, C-2, C-3
U
U1 Monitor List............................................3-9, A-26, A-27
U2 Fault Trace List............................................... 3-10, A-28
U3 Fault History List............................................ 3-11, A-29
UL File Number ............................................................... 1-3
Undertorque Detection (UL) ................................. 5-46, 5-47
Alarm/Fault ...................................................... 6-8, 6-11
Parameters .............................................................. A-21
Undervoltage (UV)
Alarm/Fault ...................................................... 6-8, 6-11
Detection Level ...................................................... A-19
Protection ..................................................................C-4
“Up Arrow” Key ....................................................... 3-2, 3-3
Up/Down Function ............................................... 6-14, A-12
User Initialization ..........................................5-3, 5-54, A-24
User Parameters....................................................... A-2, A-3
User Monitor ..............................................5-51, A-23, A-24
V
Ventilation ............................................................... 1-3, 1-14
Verify Copy Function ..................................................... 5-56
Error ............................................................... 5-58, 6-13
VERIFY Menu ........................................................ 3-7, 3-14
V/f Pattern ...................................................................... 5-28
Faults/Errors..................................................... 6-6, 6-12
Parameters .............................................................. A-10
Selection.................................................................. 5-28
Vibration, Maximum ........................................................C-4
Voltage
Allowable fluctuation .......................6-8, 6-11, C-2, C-3
Base ........................................................................ A-10
Drop Calculation........................................................2-7
Input - See Input Voltage ........................................ A-10
Maximum Output ............................................. C-2, C-3
Rating, Drive .............................................1-4, C-2, C-3
Related Parameters ................................................. A-10
W
Watchdog Timer................................................................6-3
Weight ........................................................... 1-3, 1-7 to 1-10
Wire
Clamping Torque ............................................ 2-3 to 2-7
Gauge.............................................................. 2-3 to 2-7
Length .............................................................2-11, 6-18
Size ................................................................. 2-3 to 2-7
Wiring, Electrical Installation ...........................................2-1
Control Circuit .........................................................2-12
Diagram ...................................................................2-18
Distances.................................................................. 2-11
Field Diagram ..........................................................2-20
Ground ............................................................. 2-11, F-2
Main Circuit
Configurations .......................................... 2-9, 2-10
Terminals ................................................. 2-3 to 2-7
Shielded Twisted-Pair Wires ...................................2-19
Sinking/Sourcing .....................................................2-17
Three-Wire Control......................................... 5-3 to 5-5
Two-Wire Control .......................................... 5-3 to 5-5
Z
Zero speed output signal ................................................ A-15
Index - 9
Index - 10
Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada
Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows:
Normal:
Emergency:
Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. C.S.T.
After normal hours, 7 days a week including weekends and holidays
To contact Drives Technical Support, please call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the menu, dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products, then 5 for Technical Support.
Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e-mail at [email protected]
.
Support information, such as technical manuals, FAQs, instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website, www.drives.com
.
When calling for technical support, please have the following materials available:
The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this
Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor.
(Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is greater than Motor Nameplate amps)
list with your parameter settings
A sketch of the electrical powertrain, from AC line to motor, including filters and disconnects
Field Service, Start Up Assistance, Factory Repair, Replacement Parts, and Other Support
Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs.
Technical Training
Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers, at customer sites, and via the internet.
For information, visit www.drives.com
or call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the phone menu, dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products, then 4 for Product Training.
Support in Other Countries
Yaskawa is a multi-national company with offices and service representation around the world.
To obtain support, always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance.
Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance.
E7 Drive
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Drives Division
16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418
Internet: http://www.drives.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
MOTOMAN INC.
805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.
Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277
Internet: http://www.motoman.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan
Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000
Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301
MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB
Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden
Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410
MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH
Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom
Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore
Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003
TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)
10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677
YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED
Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong
Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,
21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China
Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851
SHANGHAI OFFICE
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.
27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China
Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China
Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.
7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,
Beijing 100076 China
Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878
YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN
B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239
YEA Document Number: TM.E7.01 7/31/2007 Rev. 07-07
Data subject to change without notice. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Variable torque AC drive
HVAC applications
Built-in network communications
Embedded communication protocols
Built-in PI control
Closed loop control for fans and pumps
Frequently asked questions
The E7 drive is designed for HVAC applications in building automation, including fans, blowers, and pumps.
The E7 drive supports Johnson Controls Metasys®, Siemens APOGEETM FLN, and Modbus®.
The built-in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system. It includes feedback display, inverse, square root, and differential control functions, and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.